Marantz Stereo System SR6003 User Manual
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
ENGLISH  
AV Surround Receiver  
SR6003  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Safety Information!  
IMPORTANT SAFETY  
• This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless  
proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with  
liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.  
READ BEFORE OPERATING EQUIPMENT  
This product was designed and manufactured to meet strict quality and safety standards.  
There are, however, some installation and operation precautions which you should be particularly  
aware of.  
• When the switch is in the OFF position, the apparatus isn’t completely switched-off from the  
MAINS.  
1. Read these instructions.  
2. Keep these instructions.  
3. Heed all warnings.  
• The equipment shall be installed near the power supply so that the power supply is easily  
accessible.  
• Do not touch hot areas, especially around the “hot surface mark” during and immediately  
after use.  
4. Follow all instructions.  
• During and immediately after use, this product is hot in areas other than the controls and  
rear panel connection jacks. Do not touch hot areas, especially around the “hot surface  
mark” and the top panel. Contact with hot areas can cause burns.  
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6. Clean only with dry cloth.  
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacture's  
instructions.  
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other  
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
Hot surface mark  
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug  
has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and  
a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety.  
If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of  
the obsolete outlet.  
• Do not expose the unit and batteries to excessive heat such as direct sunlight, fire or the  
like.  
• Make a space of about 8 inchs (0.2 m) around the unit.  
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.  
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.  
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer,  
or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/  
apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.  
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.  
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the  
apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged,  
liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been  
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.  
AV_080708U2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
INTRODUCTION  
Thank you for purchasing the Marantz SR6003 Surround receiver.  
This remarkable component has been engineered to provide you with many years of home theater enjoyment.  
Please take a few minutes to read this manual thoroughly before you connect and operate the SR6003.  
As there are a number of connection and configuration options, you are encouraged to discuss your own  
particular home theater setup with your Marantz A/V authorized dealer.  
AM Loop Antenna  
ACCESSORIES CHECK  
Before use, check the below accessories were  
included in the package.  
FM Antenna  
AC power cable  
Remote Controller  
User Guide  
Warranty Card  
USA × 1  
Canada × 1  
AAA-size batteries (× 2)  
Microphone  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
INTRODUCTION ....................................1 SETUP ..................................................24 TROUBLESHOOTING .........................75  
ACCESSORIES CHECK....................................................1  
TABLE OF CONTENTS .........................2  
FEATURES.............................................2  
FEATURES  
This unit incorporates the latest generation of digital  
surround sound decoding technology such as Dolby  
Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1 and  
Matrix 6.1), DTS Neo:6 (Cinema, Music), Dolby Pro-  
Logic II (Movie, Music and Game), Dolby Pro-Logic  
IIx (Movie, Music and Game), Circle Surround II  
(Cinema, Music and Mono).  
GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE MENU SYSTEM........24  
1 INPUT SETUP .............................................................26  
2 SPEAKER SETUP........................................................29  
ERROR MESSAGES .......................................................32  
3 SURROUND SETUP ...................................................35  
4 VIDEO SETUP .............................................................37  
5 PREFERENCE ............................................................38  
6 ACOUSTIC EQ ............................................................40  
HDMI.................................................................................76  
USB...................................................................................76  
XM SATELLITE RADIO....................................................77  
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO .............................................77  
BEFORE USE.........................................3  
OPERATION OF REMOTE CONTROLLER......................4  
Additionally, the unit is compatible with Dolby TrueHD  
and DTS-HD (as used for Blu-ray and HD DVD discs)  
as well as Dolby Digital Plus, an expanded and  
improved version of Dolby Digital positioned as the  
next-generation delivery format.These audio formats  
can be sent with video signals via an HDMI cable to  
HDMI 1.3a-compatible equipment.  
In addition, Marantz has focused on the future. By  
utilizing pre-out jacks, 7.1 direct inputs and a RS-232C  
communication port, the unit is tomorrow’s technology,  
today!  
OTHERS ...............................................78  
SURROUND MODE.........................................................78  
DESCRIPTION .................................................................81  
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................84  
CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT EXTERNAL SURFACES...84  
REPAIRS...........................................................................84  
NAMES AND FUNCTION ......................5  
FRONT PANEL...................................................................5  
FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER...........................................6  
REMOTE CONTROLLER ..................................................7  
REAR PANEL .....................................................................9  
ADVANCED OPERATION....................42  
AMP OPERATION............................................................42  
USB OPERATION ............................................................47  
TUNER OPERATION (PRESET MEMORY)....................51  
XM RADIO OVERVIEW ...................................................53  
LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO .........................53  
SEARCH MODE...............................................................55  
PRESET MEMORY..........................................................56  
SIRIUS RADIO OVERVIEW.............................................58  
LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO...................58  
SEARCH MODE...............................................................60  
PRESET MEMORY..........................................................61  
PARENTAL LOCK.............................................................62  
ZONE SYSTEM................................................................64  
REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION..........................66  
BASIC OPERATION (REMOTE CONTROLLER) ...........68  
MACRO MODE.................................................................71  
BASIC CONNECTIONS.......................10  
SPEAKER PLACEMENT .................................................10  
CONNECTING SPEAKERS.............................................11  
CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS..........................12  
CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS..........................13  
CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS............................14  
CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS.................15  
CONNECTING THE AC POWER CABLE .......................15  
This unit can play music content that has been  
recorded on USB media in the following file formats:  
MP3, WMA, AAC and WAV. This means almost any  
music content at hand can be played back using the  
unit.  
This unit uses the Graphic User Interface in the  
setup menu. Setup using eye-pleasing 3D graphics  
is possible using the speaker setup or acoustic  
equalizer setup menu.  
BASIC OPERATION ............................16  
AMP OPERATION............................................................16  
TUNER OPERATION .......................................................16  
REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION..........................18  
This unit features a fully discrete 7 channel amplifier  
section capable of delivering 100 watts of high-  
current amplification, for continuously clean and  
stable power into each of the 7 channels. It employs  
a massive EI power transformer in combination with  
oversized filter capacitors. This design configuration  
is capable of a clear and powerful reproduction of  
the most demanding action movie soundtracks and  
full range (multichannel) music discs. Through its  
ability to generate very high output voltages, the unit  
can easily drive the most demanding speakers with  
optimum results.  
ADVANCED CONNECTIONS..............19  
CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO COMPONENTS...19  
CONNECTING THE USB MEDIA....................................19  
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER....20  
CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE (BI-AMP CONNECTION) ...20  
CONNECTION FOR ANOTHER ZONE...........................21  
CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS.........22  
CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT.............................22  
CONNECTING THE SATELLITE RADIO ........................23  
This unit incorporates the most advanced Digital  
SignalProcessingcircuitry,alongwitha192kHz/24bit  
D/A converter in each of the 7 channels.Independent  
power supply circuits are incorporated for the FL  
display, audio and video sections for maximum  
separation, clarity and dynamic range. Together with  
hand-selected customized components, all elements  
work in harmony to recreate the emotion, exactly as  
the artist had intended.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
This unit is designed and engineered with extensive  
feedback from custom installation experts, dealers  
and consumers. It features ZONE/multisource,  
assignable DC trigger, a RS-232C communication  
port, Flasher input, heavy duty speaker binding posts  
and an extensive array of both analog and digital  
inputs / outputs. With 5 assignable digital inputs (6  
total), 3 component inputs, Super Audio CD Multi  
Channel (7.1 channel) direct inputs, video convert  
system and a speaker-B and OSD output versatility  
is taken to a stunning new level. Furthermore, the  
unit can output the OSD information through the Y/C  
(S-video) and composite video outputs.  
• x.v. Color  
• Deep Color 36bit  
KEEP OBJECTS OFF  
BEFORE USE  
Keep objects off the unit. Blocking the vent can result  
in accident and damage.  
• Dolby True HD, Dolby Digital Plus, dts HD  
• Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES  
(Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1, Neo:6)  
• Dolby Headphone  
• Dolby Pro Logic II (Movie, Music, Game)  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Movie, Music, Game)  
• Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music, Mono)  
• HDCD  
This section must be read before any connection is  
made to the mains supply.  
DO NOT TOUCH HOT SPOTS DURING AND  
IMMEDIATELY AFTER USE  
EQUIPMENT MAINS WORKING SETTING  
During and immediately after use, the unit is hot  
in areas other than the controls and rear panel  
connection jacks. Do not touch hot spots and  
especially the top panel. Contact with hot areas can  
cause burns.  
Your Marantz product has been prepared to comply  
with the household power and safety requirements  
that exist in your area.  
• Bi-amp drive  
• Source/Pure Direct mode  
SR6003 can be powered by 120V AC only.  
• 9 bands x 7 ch Graphic EQ  
• DSD to PCM converter  
• Audyssey MultEQ®  
COPYRIGHT  
An easy-to-use programmable, learning remote  
controller allows full access to all of the operating  
functions and can be used for system operation as  
well.  
• XM Satellite Radio Ready  
Recording and playback of any material may  
require consent. For further information refer to the  
following:  
Opening and closing the front panel door  
When you want to use the controls behind  
the front panel door, open the door by gently  
pressing on the lower part of the panel.Keep the  
door closed when not using these controls.  
• XM® HD Surround Powered by Neural Audio  
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio Ready  
• M-DAX (Marantz Dynamic Audio eXpander)  
• Improved Station Name Input Method, 60 Presets  
• AutoAdjustFunctionforSpeakerDistanceSettings  
(Delay Time)  
—
—
—
—
Copyright Act 1956  
The new generation of Marantz Receivers is stylish and  
completely symmetrical. On the front panel of the unit,  
buttons are kept to a minimum. Source selectors and  
volume controls are intuitively placed.  
This unit is here to perform in your unrivaled home  
entertainment setup.  
Dramatic and Musical Performers Act 1958  
Performers Protection Acts 1963 and 1972  
Any subsequent statutory enactments and orders  
• Assignable DC Trigger Output  
• Assignable Video Input  
• Auto Lipsync (Audio Delay)  
• 7 × 100 Watts (8 Ohms), Discrete Amplifiers  
• Massive Energy Power Supply, Huge EI  
Transformer, Large ELCO’s.  
DO NOT LOCATE IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES  
To ensure long-lasting use, do not locate the unit where:  
• Exposed to direct sunlight.  
• Near to sources of heat such as heaters.  
• Highly humid or poorly ventilated.  
• Dusty.  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is an  
enhancement to the DVI (Digital Visual Interface)  
standard. It adds capabilities for digitally transmitting  
audio signals in addition to video signals. Where  
multiple cables were previously needed for audio/  
video, HDMI enables audio/video connection via a  
single cable.  
The HDMI input jacks of this unit support HDMI Ver.  
1.3a. and the HDMI output jacks of this transmitter  
support HDMI Ver. 1.3a.  
• Function Rename  
• 192 kHz/24 bit DAC for all 8 Channels  
• 32 bit Digital Surround Processing Chipsets  
• Auto Input Signal Detection  
• Front Digital Optical Input  
• ZONE B Output (Digital Optical Output)  
• Video Off Mode  
• Subjected to mechanical vibrations.  
•
On wobbly, inclined or otherwise unstable surfaces  
• Radiated heat is blocked such as in cramped  
audio racks.  
To ensure proper heat radiation, ensure the below  
clearance from walls and other equipment.  
• Graphical User Interface  
•
Menu via all Video Output  
(Composite, S-Video, Component Video and  
HDMI)  
Caution:  
• Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the  
door and the panel.  
• Video Up/Down Converter  
(HDMI ← Component Video ↔  
S-Video ↔ Composit Video)  
This unit supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital  
Content Protection). HDCP is copyright protection  
technology that consists of data encoding and other  
device authentication. Its purpose is to protect digital  
video content. Both this unit and the connected  
component (such as a video player or monitor) must  
support HDCP. Before connecting a component to  
this unit, refer to its instruction manual.  
Above  
8 inchs (0.2 m)  
or more  
• Two HDMI Outputs  
Right  
8 inchs (0.2 m)  
or more  
• Two Component Monitor Outputs  
• Analog Video Up-scaling to HDMI Output  
(480i→480p→720p→1080i→1080p)  
• USB Audio Player (MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV)  
• RS-232C Terminal for Future Upgrade or System  
Control  
Left  
8 inchs (0.2 m)  
or more  
• Flasher Input  
• Full Backlight Learning Remote Controller  
Rear  
8 inchs (0.2 m)  
or more  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
LOADING BATTERIES  
CAUTIONS ON BATTERIES  
OPERATION OF REMOTE CONTROLLER  
REMOTE CONTROL  
• Use “AAA” type batteries in this remote controller.  
• We recommend that you use alkaline batteries.  
Before using the remote controller for the first time,  
load the batteries in the remote controller. The  
batteries provided are used to verify the operations  
of the remote controller only.  
Operate the remote controller within a distance of  
approx. 16.4ft. from the infrared receptor window on  
the front of the unit.  
• If the remote controller does not operate from  
close to the unit, replace the batteries with new  
ones, even if less then a year has passed.  
1. Remove the battery cover.  
• The included battery is only for verifying operation.  
Replace it with a new battery as soon as possible.  
SR6003  
• When inserting the batteries, be careful to do so in  
the proper direction, following the + and - marks in  
the remote controller’s battery compartment.  
(5 m)  
16.4 ft.  
x.  
• To prevent damage or battery fluid leakage:  
- Do not use a new battery with an old one.  
- Do not use two different types of batteries.  
Appro  
60°  
- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or  
dispose of batteries in flames.  
Insert the new batteries (AAA type) with correct  
ª and · polarity.  
2.  
• Remove the batteries when not planning to use  
the remote controller for a long period of time.  
Remote controller  
• If the batteries should leak, carefully wipe off the  
fluid from the inside of the battery compartment,  
then insert new batteries.  
Caution:  
• Do not allow direct sunlight, an inverter fluorescent  
light or other strong source of light to shine onto  
the player’s infrared receptor window. Otherwise,  
the operation of the remote controller may be  
disabled.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country  
or area.  
• Bear in mind that operating the remote controller  
may cause other devices operated by infrared rays  
to be operated by mistake.  
• The remote controller cannot be operated if the  
space between the controller and the player’s  
infrared receptor window is obstructed.  
3. Close the battery cover until it clicks shut.  
• Do not place any objects on top of the remote  
controller.  
Doing so may cause one or more buttons to be  
held down which will cause the batteries to run  
down.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
o
BAND button  
NAMES AND FUNCTION  
FRONT PANEL  
Press this button to switch between FM and AM in  
the TUNER mode.  
!
T-MODE button  
Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or  
mono mode when the FM band is selected.  
The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.  
(See page 17)  
q w  
er t y u io ! !  
!
!
!
MEMORY button  
Press this button to enter the tuner preset memory  
numbers or station names. (See page 51)  
!
CLEAR button  
Press this button to cancel the station-memory  
setting mode or preset scan tuning. (See page 52)  
!
VOLUME control knob  
This knob is used to adjust the overall sound level.  
Turning the control clockwise increases the sound  
level.  
!!! !  
!
!
q
POWER switch and STANDBY  
indicator  
t
PURE DIRECT button and indicator  
!
INFRARED receiving sensor window  
When this button is pressed once, “SOURCE  
DIRECT” appears on the FL display.If pressed again,  
“PURE DIRECT” appears. After 2 seconds, the FL  
display indication goes out.  
In the source/pure direct mode, the tone control  
circuitry and bass management are bypassed.  
This window receives infrared signals for the remote  
controller.  
When this switch is pressed once, the unit turns ON  
and the display illuminates. When pressed again, the  
unit turns OFF and the STANDBY indicator will be  
illuminated.  
!
AUX1 INPUT jacks  
These auxiliary video/audio input jacks accept the  
connections of a camcorder, portable DVD, game  
etc. When not using these jacks, protect by the jack  
cover.  
Notes:  
w
INPUT SELECTOR knob  
(AUDIO/ VIDEO)  
• The surround mode is automatically switched to  
AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on.  
This knob is used to select the input sources. (See  
page 16)  
• Additionally, speaker configurations are fixed  
automatically as follows.  
!
Press these buttons to operate the SETUP MAIN  
MENU and TUNER function.  
Cursor (5, ∞, 2, 3) / ENTER button  
Front SPKR = LARGE  
Center SPKR = LARGE  
Surround SPKR = LARGE  
Surround Back SPKR = LARGE  
Sub woofer = YES  
e
SURROUND MODE button  
Press this button to select the surround mode.  
!
USB jack  
r
AUTO (Auto surround) button  
Connect USB media to this USB jack.  
(See page 19, 47)  
Press this button to select the AUTO mode from the  
surround modes. When this mode is selected, the  
unit determines the surround mode corresponding to  
a digital input signal automatically.  
y
DISPLAY button  
Press this button to change the FL display mode.  
!
MIC jack  
Automatically measure speaker characteristics using  
the included microphone. (See page 30)  
u
MENU button  
Press this button to enter the SETUP MAIN MENU.  
!
HEADPHONE jack for stereo headphones  
i
EXIT button  
This jack may be used to listen to the unit’s output  
through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the  
headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono  
plug.  
Press this button to exit from the SETUP MAIN  
MENU.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
WMA  
¡
DIGITAL Input Indicator  
FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER  
This indicator lights when WMA format files on the  
USB media are played back.  
MP3  
This indicator is illuminated when a digital input has  
been selected.  
asd  
f
g
h jk l ¡¡ ¡ ¡¡¡¡  
¡
¡
This indicator lights when MP3 format files on the  
USB media are played back.  
¡
ANALOG input indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when an analog input  
source has been selected.  
¡
ENCODED CHANNEL STATUS indicators  
ex1  
ex2  
These indicators display the channels that are  
encoded with a digital input signal.  
¡
2 TrueHD  
SIGNAL FORMAT indicators  
If the digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch or  
DTS 5.1ch, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “SR” and “LFE” will be  
illuminated.  
If the digital input signal is 2 channel PCM-audio, “L”  
and “R” will be illuminated.  
If the digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch signal  
with Surround EX flag or DTS-ES, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”,  
“S” , “SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.  
If the digital input signal is 7.1 channel PCM-audio.  
“L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “SBL”, “SR” “SBR”, and “LFE” will  
be illuminated.  
If the digital input signal includes a channel other  
than those above, “ex1” or “ex2” will be illuminated.  
(See page 78)  
™
¡
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby DigitalTrue  
HD signal is input.  
2 DIGITAL  
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital  
signal is input.  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital Plus  
signal is input.  
2 DIGITAL EX  
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital EX  
signal is input.  
™
a
SP (speaker) ABC indicator  
k
PEAK indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the speaker  
This indicator is a monitor for an analog audio input  
signal. If the selected analog audio input signal is  
greater than the capable level of internal processing,  
this will illuminate. If this happens, you should press  
the ATT button. (See page 8)  
system is active.  
s
SLEEP timer indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the sleep timer  
function in the main-ZONE is in use.  
l
V-OFF (Video off mode) indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the Video-OFF  
dts  
d
DISP (Display Off) indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS signal is  
input.  
dts-HD  
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS-HD signal  
is input.  
dts ES  
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS ES signal  
is input.  
dts MSTR  
This indicator is illuminated when a Master Audio  
signal is input.  
dts HIRES  
This indicator is illuminated when a High Resulution  
Audio signal is input.  
dts 96/24  
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS 96/24 signal  
is input.  
HDCD  
This indicator is illuminated when the HDCD signal is  
decoded from digital input signal.  
PCM  
function is active.  
This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the  
display off mode.  
Note:  
¡
A-SURR  
When the unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD, the input  
signal status displayed depends on the number of  
channels of the speakers used.  
If a 7.1-channel signal is supplied for a 5.1-channel  
speaker system (L/C/R/SL/SR/SW), the “SBL”,  
“SBR”, “S” indicator is not illuminated.  
(Auto Surround mode) indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the AUTO  
SURROUND mode is in use.  
f
MULTI (ZONE system) AB  
indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the ZONE system  
is active.  
¡
EQ mode indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the HT-EQ function  
g
TUNER’s indicators  
AUTO : This indicator illuminates when the  
tuner’s Auto mode is in use.  
™
Main Information Display  
is active.  
This display shows messages relating to the status,  
input source, surround mode, tuner, volume level or  
other aspects of unit’s operation.  
TUNED : This indicator illuminates when the  
tuner receives a sufficiently strong  
radio signal.  
¡
NIGHT mode indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the  
Night mode, which reduces the dynamic range of  
digital program material at low volume levels.  
™
PURE DIRECT indicator  
ST(Stereo) : This indicator illuminates when an  
FM station is being tuned into stereo  
condition.  
This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the  
PURE DIRECT mode.  
¡
M-DAX indicator  
This indicator illuminates when this unit is in the M-  
h
(Signal strength) indicator  
This indicator indicates the strength of the XM  
Satellite Radio or SIRIUS Satellite Radio signal that  
is received.  
DAX mode.  
This indicator is illuminated when the input signal is  
PCM (pulse code modulation).  
DSD  
This indicator is illuminated when a DSD signal is  
input.  
¡
HDMI indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the HDMI device is  
connected to the unit.  
j
ATT (Attenuation) indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the attenuation  
AAC  
function is active.  
This indicator lights when AAC format files on the  
USB media are played back.  
¡
Audyssey indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the EQ MODE is  
selected to “AUDYSSEY”, “AUDYSSEY FRONT” or  
“AUDYSSEY FLAT”.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
(When DMP (USB) mode is selected)  
⁄
1,2,3,4(CURSOR) / ENTER buttons  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
z
/
POWER ON and OFF buttons  
These buttons are used when controlling the cursor  
of the unit, DVD or other AV equipment.  
; button  
This pauses playback.  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
These buttons are used to turn the unit on or off.  
The provided remote controller is a universal  
remote controller. The POWER button, numeric  
buttons and control buttons are used in common  
across different input source components.  
The input source controlled with the remote controller  
changes when one of the input selector buttons is  
pressed.  
(When Tuner mode mode is selected)  
2 button  
This starts playback.  
PRESET +/ PRESET - buttons  
Used to select a preset station up and down.  
x
Z.SPKR button  
9 button  
This stops playback.  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
This button is used to turn on and off ZONE  
speaker.  
TUNE 3 /TUNE 4 buttons  
Used to tune a frequency station up and down.  
∞ / § buttons  
Skips forward or previous.  
5 / 6 buttons  
Serchs forward or backward.  
⁄
EXIT / MEMO button  
‹
c
ZONE A / B buttons  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
This button is used to cancel setting in the setup  
menu.  
These button are used to turn the ZONE system on  
or off.  
⁄
REPEAT button  
This button is used to select the REPEAT mode of  
(When TUNER mode is selected)  
This button is used to store the setting of preset  
channel and others.  
a source.  
v
7.1 (7.1CH IN) button  
z
‹
‹
‹
¤
¤
This button is used to select the output of an external  
multi channel decoder.  
x
c
v
b
⁄
RANDOM button  
This button is used to select the RANDOM mode of  
⁄
CONTROL buttons  
a source.  
b
SPKR A/B button  
These buttons are used when operating PLAY, STOP,  
PAUSE and other commands of a source.  
This button is used to select the speaker system.  
The speaker system is switched in the following  
sequence.  
¤
(When TUNER mode is selected)  
⁄
TV CONTROL buttons  
These buttons are used when operating of TV and  
T.MODE button  
n
A → B → A+B → off  
¤
¤
Monitor.  
This button is used to select auto stereo mode or  
mono mode when the FM band is selected.  
The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.  
m
,
n
MUTE button  
⁄
BASS / CH +/- buttons  
This button is used to mute the audio for the  
amplifier.  
P.SCAN button  
This button is used to start preset scan.  
¤
¤
.
⁄
⁄
(When AMP mode is selected)  
These buttons are used to adjust the tone control  
of low frequency sound for left, right and subwoofer  
speaker.  
BAND button  
This button is used to select a radio band.  
m
LIGHT button  
This button is used to turn on the backlight for the  
buttons.  
T.DISP button  
This button is used to select the display mode in XM  
Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio.  
(When TV/DSS mode are selected)  
These buttons are used to change channels.  
¤
¤
⁄
⁄
PTY button  
These button is not used for this unit.  
,
VOLUME +/- buttons  
⁄
TREBLE / CAT +/- buttons  
This button is used to adjust the volume for the  
amplifier.  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
These buttons are used to adjust the tone control of  
high frequency sound for left and right speaker.  
F.DIRECT button  
This button is used to select the "Frequency direct  
input".  
⁄
⁄
¤
.
SURR (SURROUND) button  
P.LOCK button  
This button selects the parental lock of SIRIUS  
Satellite Radio.  
⁄
(When a mode other than DMP (USB) is selected)  
This button is used to selects the surround mode.  
⁄
⁄
⁄
CL (Clear) / T.TONE button  
This button is used to erase the memory or program  
(When DMP (USB) mode is selected)  
This button is used to select the next page.  
of a source include the Tuner mode.  
⁄
(When AMP mode is selected)  
This button is used to enter the test tone menu.  
⁄
INFO button  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
When this button is pressed, the current setting of AV  
receiver are displayed on the connected TV monitor.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
¤
Numeric buttons  
¤
DISPLAY button  
¤
A/D button  
These buttons are used to switch between 0 to +10  
of the source components.  
If the source is set to the amplifier, these buttons are  
used to perform operations.  
This button is used to switch between the analog and  
digital inputs.  
(When a mode other than DMP (USB) is selected)  
This button is used to selects the display mode for the  
front display of the unit.  
(When DMP mode (USB) is selected)  
This button is used to select the previous page.  
‹
HDMI button  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
This button is used to select HDMI OUTPUT 1 or 2.  
1/AUTO button  
‹ ‹  
‹
‹
This button is used to select auto surround.  
¤
INPUT 3 button  
‹
SET button  
2/STEREO button  
This button is used to select STEREO mode.  
This button is for forward-feeding the input source to  
select a desired source.  
This button is used to enter learn mode and preset  
mode.  
‹
LEARN indicator  
This indicator is displayed when the remote controller  
3/P.DIRECT button  
When this button is pressed once, SOURCE DIRECT  
mode is selected.  
INPUT 4 button  
is in the LEARN mode.  
This button is for backward-feeding the input source  
to select a desired source.  
‹
/
SOURCE ON/OFF button  
If pressed again, PURE DIRECT mode is selected.  
This button is used to turn a specific source (such as  
a DVD player) on or off independently from the rest  
of the system.  
‹
MACRO indicator  
4/SLEEP button  
This button is used for setting the sleep timer.  
This is displayed when a macro program is selected  
¤
SETUP button  
by the remote controller.  
This button is used to setup for DVD and other  
device.  
5/M-DAX button  
This button is used to select M-DAX mode.  
‹
Infrared Transmitter and Learning  
Sensor  
‹
Information indicator  
6/EQ button  
This button is used to select Audyssey mode.  
Information about the sources and modes are shown  
This transmitter emits infrared light.Press the buttons  
while pointing the transmitter towards the infrared  
receiver window of the unit or other AV equipment.  
Be sure to also point towards other remote controllers  
when using the learning function.  
¤
SOURCE button  
on the LCD.  
These buttons are used to switch the source of your  
A/V Receiver. Each time a source button is pressed,  
the remote controller changes to the source which  
was pressed.  
This remote controller can control 12 types of  
equipment. To change the A/V Receiver source,  
press this button twice within two seconds.The signal  
is sent when it is pressed the second time.  
7/LIP SYNC button  
This button is used to select LIP SYNC mode.  
‹
indicator  
8/NIGHT button  
Pressing this button prevents the Dolby Digital signal  
from playback at a loud voice.  
When this button is pressed, the “NIGHT” indicator  
is illuminated.  
This indicator is displayed when the remote controller  
is transmitting a signal.  
9/V.OFF buton  
This button is used to turn off the video signal.  
Notes:  
• Select the AMP as the source to use this remote  
controller with the unit.  
0/CH SEL button  
This button is used to call up CH LEVEL ADJUST  
and adjust speaker levels or 7.1 ch input level.  
• In the case of the unit, the DMP button cannot be  
used.  
¤
M (MACRO) button  
¤
ATT. button  
This button is used to program Macros. Pressing this  
button switches between Normal mode and Macro  
mode.  
When the input signal is too high and the voice  
distorts even by throttling the unit VOLUME control,  
turn on this function.  
“ATT” is indicated when this function is activated.  
The input level reduced. Attenuator is invalid for the  
output signal of “REC OUT”.  
¤
MENU button  
(When AMP mode is selected)  
This button is used to call up the SETUP MAIN  
MENU of the unit.  
Note:  
This function is unavailable while the digital input is  
selected.  
¤
TOP button  
Pressing this button during setup returns you to the  
top screen of the setup main menu.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Speaker outputs terminals  
Seven terminals are provided for the front left,  
front right, front center, surround left, surround  
right, surround back left and surround back right  
speakers.  
o
SIRIUS terminal  
!
REAR PANEL  
TM  
Connect to the SiriusConnect Home Tuner.  
(See page 23)  
q
w
e
r
t
y
!
AC OUTLETS  
Connect the AC power cables of components such as  
a DVD and CD player to these outlets. SWITCHED and  
UNSWITCHED outlets are provided.  
Note:  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
You can use surround back speaker terminals as  
ZONE SPEAKER A terminals, when you use no  
surround back speaker.  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FM  
75Ω  
(
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
INPUT 2(DVD) INPUT 3(VCR)  
The one marked SWITCHED provides power only  
whentheunitisturnedonandisusefulforcomponents  
which you use every time you play your system.  
The one marked UNSWITCHED is always live as  
long as the unit is plugged into a live outlet.  
A component connected here may be left on  
permanently, or may be switched off with via its own  
power switch.  
INPUT 1(TV)  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
S-VIDEO  
(3)  
VCR OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR OUT  
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
TV(1)  
DVD(2)  
VCR IN  
Y
CB/P  
B
C
R
/
PR  
Y
CB/PB  
CR/P  
R
Y
CB/PB  
CR/PR  
(
)
L
SL  
C
SBL ZONE A  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
REC/ZONE  
DIGITAL IN  
B
L
IN  
!
ZONE A Outputs  
4
1
5
2
These are the audio output jacks for the ZONE A.  
Connect these jacks to optional audio power  
amplifiers to listen the source selected by the ZONE  
system in a remote room.  
R
3
R
SR  
SW  
(AUX 2) 7.1CH INPUT  
SBR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
RS-232C  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
L
SL  
C
SBL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
UNSWITCHED  
1.25AA 150W  
MODEL NO. SR6003  
!
SPEAKER C SELECTOR SWITCH  
Caution:  
FRONT A  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25AA 150W  
AC IN  
R
SR  
SW  
SBR  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
The terminals can be used to connect a third set of  
speakers by setting the SPEAKER C selector switch  
to ON. For connection and use, see page 20.  
SPEAKER SYYSTEMS  
• In order to avoid potential turn-off thumps, anything  
plugged into these outlets should be powered up  
before the unit is turned on.  
PRE OUT  
! !  
! !  
•
The capacity of this AC outlet is 150W. Do not connect  
devices that consume electricity more than the capacity  
of these AC outlets. If the total power consumption  
of the connected devices exceeds the capacity, the  
protection circuit shuts down the power supply.  
!
Preamp Outputs  
(L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)  
@@ !!!!  
!
!o i u  
Jacks for L(front left), R (front right), C (Center), SL  
(surround left), SR (surround right), SBL (surround  
back left) and SBR (surround back right).  
Use these jacks for connection to external power  
amplifiers.  
q
FM antenna terminal (75 ohms)  
Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial  
cable, or a cable network FM source.  
t
MONITOR OUT  
This is a monitor output and each one includes both  
composite video and S-video configurations. When  
connecting two video monitors or televisions, be  
aware that the OSD interface can be used with both  
MONITOR OUT connections.  
!
REMOTE CONT. IN/OUT terminals  
Connect to a Marantz component equipped with  
AM antenna and ground terminals  
Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. Use the  
terminals marked “AM” and “GND”. The supplied AM  
loop antenna will provide good AM reception in most  
areas. Position the loop antenna until you hear the  
best reception.  
remote control (RC-5) terminals.  
!
Subwoofer Output  
!
FLASHER IN  
Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered  
subwoofer. If an external subwoofer amplifier is used,  
connect this jack to the subwoofer amplifier input.  
If you are using two subwoofers, either powered or  
with a 2 channel subwoofer amplifier, connect a “Y”  
connector to the subwoofer output jack and run one  
cable from it to each subwoofer amplifier.  
y
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/  
OUTPUT  
(Flasher input terminal)  
These terminals are to control the unit from each  
ZONE. Connect the control signal from a Keypad,  
etc.  
If your DVD player or other device has component  
video connectors, be sure to connect them to these  
component video connectors on the unit. This unit  
has two component video input connectors to obtain  
w
HDMI INPUT/OUTPUT  
The unit has 3 HDMI inputs and 2 HDMI outputs.The  
input function can be selected from the GUI menu  
system. (See page 26)  
!
DC TRIGGER output terminal  
B
R
Connect a device that needs to be triggered by DC  
under certain conditions (screen, power strip, etc…)  
Use the system OSD setup menu to determine the  
conditions by which these jack will be active.  
the color information (Y, C , C ) directly from the  
recorded DVD signal or other video component and  
one component video output connector to output it  
directly into the matrix decoder of the display device.  
By sending the pure DVD component video signal  
directly, the DVD signal forgoes the extra processing  
that normally would degrade the image. The result is  
vastly increased image quality, with incredibly life like  
colors and crisp detail.  
@
RS-232C  
The RS-232C port is to be used in conjunction with  
an external controller to control the operation of the  
unit by using an external device.  
e
AUDIO IN/OUT (TAPE, CD/CDR,TV,  
DVD,VCR, DSS)  
Note:  
These are the analog audio inputs and outputs.There  
are 6 audio inputs (4 of which are linked to video  
inputs) and 3 audio outputs (1 of which are linked to  
video outputs).The audio jacks are nominally labeled  
for cassette tape decks, compact disc players, DVD  
players and etc.... The audio inputs and outputs  
require RCA-type connectors.  
This output voltage is for (status) control only, It is not  
sufficient for drive capability.  
@
7.1 CHANNEL or AUX2 INPUT  
By connecting a DVD Audio player, Super Audio CD  
multichannel player, or other components that has a  
multichannel port, you can playback the audio with  
5.1 channel or 7.1 channel outputs.  
!
DIGITAL INPUT  
Whenthevideoconvertfunctionisenabled, videoand  
S-video images can be output to the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUTPUT jacks.  
(DIGITAL IN 1-5) / OUTPUT (optical)  
These are the digital audio inputs and output.  
The unit has 2 digital inputs with coaxial jacks, 3 with  
optical jacks.  
The inputs accept digital audio signals from a CD,  
DVD, or other digital source component.  
For digital output, this is 1 optical output.  
ThedigitaloutputscanbeconnectedtoMDrecorders,  
CD recorders, or other similar components.  
In addition, this digital output can be used as ZONE  
B output.  
r
VIDEO IN/OUT (TV, DVD,VCR, DSS)  
u
XM terminal  
These are the video inputs and outputs. There  
are 4 video inputs and 1 video output and each  
one includes both composite video and S-video  
configurations. Connect VCRs, DVD players, and  
other video components to the video inputs.  
Connect to the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.  
(See page 23)  
i
AC INLET  
Plug the supplied power cable into this AC INLET  
and then into the power outlet on the wall.  
This unit can be powered by 120V AC only.  
The video output channel can be used to be connected  
to video tape recorders for making recordings.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Front left and right speakers  
HEIGHT OF THE SPEAKER UNITS  
We recommend to set the front L and R speakers  
with 45-60 degrees from the listening position.  
BASIC CONNECTIONS  
SPEAKER PLACEMENT  
Front left and right speakers, and a center speaker  
Align the tweeters and mid-range drivers on the  
three front speakers at the same height, as best as  
possible.  
Center speaker  
Align the front line of the center speaker with the front  
L/R speakers. Or place the center speaker a little  
backward from the line.  
The ideal surround speaker system for this unit is 7-  
speaker systems, using front left and right speakers,  
a center speaker, surround left and right speakers,  
a surround back left and right speakers, and a  
subwoofer.  
For best results we recommend that all front speakers  
be of the same type, with identical or similar driver  
units. This will deliver smooth pans across the front  
sound stage as the action moves from side to side.  
Your center channel speaker is very important as  
over 80 % of the dialog from a typical motion picture  
emanates from the center channel.  
Subwoofer  
Front Right  
Surround left and right speakers, and surround  
back speaker  
Place the surround left, right and surround back  
speakers higher than your ears by about 27-9/16  
– 39-3/8 inchs (70cm–1m). Also place the speakers  
at the same height, as best as possible.  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right  
Surround left and right speakers  
When this unit is used in surround operation, the  
preferred location for surround speakers is on the  
side walls of the room, at or slightly behind the  
listening position.  
Front Center  
The center of the speaker should face into the room.  
Surround back left and right speakers  
Surround back speakers are required when a full 7.1-  
channel system is installed.  
Speakers should be placed on a rear wall, behind the  
listening position.  
27-9/16 – 39-3/8 inchs  
(70cm–1m)  
It should possess similar sonic characteristics to the  
main speakers. Surround channel speakers need not  
be identical to the front channel speakers, but they  
should be of high quality.  
Front Left  
Surround Left  
The center of the speaker should face into the room.  
Surround Back Left  
Subwoofer  
We recommend using a sub-woofer to have maximum  
bass effect. As the subwoofer only handle low frequency.  
You can place it any where in the room.  
The surround center speaker is useful for playback  
of Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES. One of  
the benefits of both Dolby Digital and DTS is that  
surround channels are discrete full range, while they  
were frequency limited in earlier “Pro Logic” type  
systems.  
Bass effects are an important part of home theater.  
For optimal enjoyment a subwoofer should be used  
as it is optimized for low frequency reproduction.If you  
have full range front speakers, however, they may be  
used in place of a subwoofer with proper setting of the  
switches in the menu system.  
Note:  
• Use magnetically-shielded speakers for front left,  
right and the center speakers when the speakers are  
installed near the TV.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Caution:  
CONNECTING SPEAKER WIRE  
CONNECTING SPEAKERS  
•
Be sure to use speakers with the specified impedance as  
shown on the rear panel of this unit.  
Strip away approx. 3/8 inch (10 mm) of wire  
insulation.  
1.  
Powered  
subwoofer  
FRONT A  
FRONT B  
Left  
Right  
Surround BACK  
Left  
•
To prevent damage to circuitry, do not let the bare  
speaker wires touch each other and do not let them  
touch any metal part of this unit.  
Left  
Right  
Right  
Twist the bared wire ends tight, to prevent short  
circuits.  
2.  
Loosen the knob by turning it counterclockwise.  
3.  
4.  
Insert the bare part of the wire into the hole in  
side of each terminal.  
Tighten the knob by turning it clockwise to  
secure the wire.  
5.  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FM  
75Ω  
(
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
INPUT 2(DVD) INPUT 3(VCR)  
INPUT 1(TV)  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
1.  
2.  
S-VIDEO  
• Do not touch the speaker terminals when the  
power is on. It may cause you to receive an electric  
shocks.  
TV(1)  
DVD(2) VCR IN(3) VCR OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR OUT  
Y
C
B/  
P
B
C
R
/P  
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/P  
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/PR  
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
(
)
L
SL  
C
SBL ZONE  
A
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
REC/ZONE B  
DIGITAL IN  
L
IN  
4
1
5
2
R
• Do not connect more than one speaker cable to one  
speaker terminal. Doing so may damage this unit.  
3/8 inch  
(10 mm)  
3
R
SR  
SW  
SBR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
(AUX 2) 7.1CH INPUT  
RS-232C  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Note:  
Be sure to connect the positive and negative cables for  
L
SL  
C
SBL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
UNSWITCHED  
1.25AA 150W  
MODEL NO. SSR6003  
•
the speaker properly. If they are miss-connected, the  
signal phase will be reversed and the signal quality will  
be corrupted.  
FRONT A  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25AA 150W  
AC IN  
R
SR  
SW  
SW  
SBR  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
PRE  
PRE  
OUT  
OUT  
CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER  
Use the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack to connect a  
powered subwoofer (power amplifier built in ).  
Right  
Left  
Center  
Surround  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
The output audio signal from the TAPE OUT jack and  
the CD/CD RECORDER OUT jack is the same signal  
which is currently selected.  
CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS  
CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS  
• There are 5 digital inputs, 2 coaxial jacks and  
3 optical jacks, on the rear panel. You can use  
these jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS  
bitstream signals from a CD, DVD, or other digital  
source components.  
Tape Deck  
CD recorder  
Caution:  
OUT IN  
L
L
• Do not connect this unit and other components  
to mains power until all connections between  
components have been completed.  
R
R
• There is one optical output jack on the rear panel.  
This jack can be connected to a CD recorder or  
a MD recorder input.When you use this jack as  
ZONE B, you cannot use it as recording output.  
(See page 9, 38)  
OUT IN  
DIGITAL DIGITAL  
Notes:  
L
L
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
R
R
• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Incomplete  
connections may make noise.  
• Be sure to connect the left and right channels  
properly.  
L
R
R
L
• Refer to the instructions for each component. To  
setup the digital audio format of DVD player, or  
other digital source’s connected to digital input  
jacks.  
R
Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and  
white connectors are for the L (left) channel.  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
VIDEO  
FM  
75Ω  
(
)
• Be sure to connect input and output properly.  
GND AM ANTENNA  
INPUT 2(DVD) INPUT 3(VCR)  
INPUT 1(TV)  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
• Use fiber optical cables (optical) for DIG-1,2,3  
input jacks and REC/ZONE B output jack. Use 75  
ohms coaxial cables (for digital audio or video) for  
DIG-4, 5 input jacks.  
S-VIDEO  
• Refer to the instructions for each component that is  
connected to this unit.  
DSS(4)  
L FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
N
MONITOR OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
TV(1)  
DVD(2) VCR IN(3) VCR OUT  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/PR  
)
(
L
SL  
C
SBL ZONE  
A
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
T
APE  
APE  
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
D
IGITAL  
D
D
I
I
G
G
I
I
T
T
A
A
L
L
IINN  
R
EC  
C
/
/
Z
Z
O
O
NE  
E
B
B
L
IN  
4
1
5
5
• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with  
power cables and speaker cables this will result in  
generating a hum or other noise.  
R
R
2
3
R
SR  
SW  
SBR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OU  
OU  
T
T
I
I
NN  
OUT  
OU  
OU  
T
T
DC OUT OUT  
(AUX 2) 7.1CH INPUT  
RS-232C  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
• You can designate the input for each digital input/  
output jacks according to your component. (See  
page 27)  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
L
SL  
C
SBL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
Notes:  
FRONT A  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
AC  
R
SR  
SW  
SBR  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
PRE OUT  
• The digital signal jacks on this unit conform to  
the EIA standard. If you use a cable that does not  
conform to this standard, this unit may not function  
properly.  
R
L
R
L
• Each type of audio jack works independently.  
Signals input through the digital and analog jacks are  
output through the corresponding digital and analog  
jacks, respectively.  
Analog Audio  
Digital Audio (coaxial)  
Digital Audio (optical)  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS  
CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS  
There are 3 types of video jacks on the rear panel.  
VIDEO  
PROJECTOR  
VIDEO jack  
DVD player  
The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is the  
conventional composite video signal.  
Satellite Tuner  
S-VIDEO jack  
The video signal is separated into luminance (Y) and  
color (C) signals for the S-VIDEO jack.The S-VIDEO  
signals enables high-quality color reproduction. If  
your video component has an S-VIDEO output, we  
recommend to use it. Connect the S-VIDEO output  
jack on your video component to the S-VIDEO input  
jack on this unit.  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
COMPONENT  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
OUT OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Y
CB  
/PB  
CR  
/PR  
Y
CB  
/PB  
CR  
/PR  
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
COMPONENT jack  
Make component video connections to a TV or  
monitor with component inputs to produce higher  
quality video images. Use a component video cable  
or 3 video cords to connect the component video out  
jacks on the unit to the monitor.  
R
L
R
L
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
(
)
)
( )  
( )  
VCR  
INPUT 3 VCR  
INPUT 11  
T
T
V
V
CCOMPOONENTT  
VVIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
D
AM ANTENNA  
INPUT 2(DVD) INPUT 3(VCR)  
ANTENNA  
2(DVD) INPUT 3(VCR)  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
)
VCR IN(  
VCR IN  
(
3
)
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
TV(1)  
TV(1)  
DVD(2) VCR IN(3) VCR OUT  
D
MONITOR OUT  
SSSS(4) MONITOR OUT  
(4)  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/PR  
)
D
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
TV  
(1)  
DVD(2  
MONITOR OUT  
VVCCRR OOUUTT DSS(4) MONITOR OUT  
YY  
C
B
/
2
P
B
C
C
R
R
/
/
P
P
R
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/P  
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/PR  
(
C
SBL ZONE  
A
T
T
V
V
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
DSS  
TAPE  
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
(
(
)
)
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
DDIGITAL IN  
REC/ZONE B  
SBL ZONE  
A
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
I
NPUT  
D
D
VD  
VD  
OOUU  
TT  
PP  
TT  
11  
OUTPUT 2  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
DIIGITAL IN  
REC/ZONE B  
SIRIUS  
IN  
IN  
Notes:  
4
4
5
2
4
5
2
•
Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels  
properly.  
1
3
1
3
SW  
SBR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
SBR  
OUT  
IN  
OU  
T
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
INPUT  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
AKER C  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and  
white connectors are for the L (left) channel.  
C
SBL  
SBL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
MODEL NO. SR6003  
• Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the  
video signals properly.  
FRONT A  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
FRONT A  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
AC I  
AC IN  
SW  
SBR  
SBR  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
OUT  
•
If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal to  
the S-VIDEO or component jack on this unit, it is not  
necessary to connect the conventional video signal to  
the VIDEO (composite) jack. If you use both video  
inputs, this unit gives priority to the S-VIDEO signal.  
R
L
Video  
• Each type of video jack works independently.  
Signals input to the VIDEO (composite) and S-  
VIDEO jacks or component are output to the  
corresponding VIDEO (composite) and S-VIDEO  
or component jacks, respectively.  
L
R
R
L
S-Video  
L
R
Analog Audio  
•
This unit has the “TV-AUTO ON/OFF” function to  
turn the TV ON or OFF automatically, by sensing the  
incoming video signal from the VIDEO jacks.  
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Digital Audio  
(coaxial)  
L
R
• You may need to setup the digital audio output  
format of your DVD player, or other digital source  
components. Refer to the instructions of the each  
component connected to the digital input jacks.  
L
R
L
R
Digital Audio  
(optical)  
AUDIO AUDIO  
OUT IN  
VIDEO  
OUT IN  
S-VIDEO  
OUT IN  
• The COMPONENT OUTPUT 1 and 2 terminals of  
this unit can output the same video signal. (See page  
37)  
L
R
L
R
TV  
VCR  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
• Some source devices such as DVD players or set  
top box do not support HDMI repeater operations  
like those of the unit. In such case, pictures are not  
properly projected on monitors such as TVs and  
projectors.  
HDMI JACKS  
CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS  
This unit has three HDMI inputs and two HDMI  
outputs. It can send digital video and audio signals  
from DVDs and other sources directly to a display.  
It minimizes signal degradation caused by analog  
conversion so that high quality images can be  
enjoyed.  
DVD player  
VIDEO PROJECTOR  
HDMI INPUT  
• When multiple components are connected to this  
unit, turn power to unused components off to  
prevent interference between them.  
HDMI OUTPUT  
This unit is also capable of converting analog video  
signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component  
Video) for HDMI output.  
• Disconnecting or connecting cables with the power  
on can damage the equipment. Turn the power off  
before disconnecting or connecting cables.  
Select an input source from the GUI menu system. (See  
page 27)  
• If the DVD player that does not support HDMI 1.1  
or later is connected to the unit, multi channel PCM  
playback is not possible even with DVD-Audio  
disks.  
Notes:  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
• If the Super Audio CD player that does not support  
*
HDMI 1.2 or later is connected to the unit, DSD  
playback is not possible even with Super Audio  
CD.  
• When the HDMI output is connected to a display  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FM  
75Ω  
*
monitor that does not support HDCP , signals are  
(
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
INPUT 2(DVD) INPUT 3(  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
( ) ( )  
VCR)  
INPUT 2 DVD INPUT 3 VCR  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
S-VIDEO  
not output. To view images in HDMI, it is necessary  
to connect to a display that supports HDCP.  
( )  
4
(
TV  
)
1
( )  
DVD 2  
(
)
DSS  
MONITOR OUT  
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
VCR IN  
3
VCR OUT  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
C
R
/
P
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/  
PR  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/PR  
(
)
L
SL  
C
SBL ZONE A  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
REC/ZONE B  
DIGITTAL IN  
(*DSD: Direct Stream Digital)  
L
IN  
• There may be no image output if connected to a  
TV or display that is not compatible with the above  
format.  
4
1
5
2
• The following functions are not available when the  
unit is connected to equipment that does not support  
HDMI 1.3a.  
R
3
R
AUX 2 7.1CH INPUT  
SR  
SW  
SBR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
(
)
RS-232C  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
• Refer to the instruction manual of the TV or display  
to be connected to the unit for detailed information  
regarding the HDMI terminal.  
• Deep Color  
• x.v. Color  
L
SL  
C
SBL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
MODEL NO. SR6003  
• Bitstream audio signal decoding, as for Dolby  
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, and so on  
FRONT A  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
AC IN  
R
SR  
SW  
SBR  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
* HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
PRE OUT  
For details, refer to the user’s manuals of connected  
equipment.  
CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS  
• Multi channel PCM signals and audio signals of 64  
kHz or higher that are input from the HDMI jack are  
not output from the DIGITAL OUT jack.  
An HDMI cable (sold separately) is used to connect the  
HDMI jack on the unit with the HDMI jack on the DVD  
player, TV, projector or other component. To transmit  
multichannel audio via HDMI, the connected player  
must support multichannel audio transmission through  
its HDMI jack.  
SATELLITE TUNER  
HDMI OUTPUT  
• Depending on the quiality of the cable used, the  
HDMI signal may be affected by noise.  
Notes:  
• Some HDMI components can be controlled over  
the HDMI cable, but this unit cannot control other  
components this way.  
• When connected to a monitor (i.e., TV, projector,  
etc.) that does not support HDCP, video and audio  
are not output.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CONNECTING THE AC POWER CABLE  
CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS  
CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS  
Connecting the supplied FM antenna  
The supplied FM antenna is for indoor use only.  
During use, extend the antenna and move it in various  
directions until the clearest signal is received.  
Fix it with push pins or similar implements in  
the position that will cause the least amount of  
distortion.  
Plug the supplied AC power cable to the AC IN  
socket on the rear panel of the unit.  
AM Loop  
Antenna  
1.  
AM External  
Antenna  
FM Antenna  
FM External  
Antenna  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
(4)  
DVD(2) VCR IN(3) VCR OUT DSS  
1)  
MONITOR OUT  
Y
CB/P  
B
CR/P  
R
Y
CB/  
PB  
CR/PR  
Y
CB/P  
B
CR/PR  
(
)
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
REC/ZONE B  
DIGITAL IN  
If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor  
antenna may improve the quality.  
IN  
5
2
3
OUT DC OUT OUT  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
Connecting the supplied AM loop antenna  
The supplied AM loop antenna is for indoor use  
only.  
AC IN  
R
L
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
1.0W  
MODEL NO.. SR6003  
C
VIDEO  
FM  
FM  
(
(
)
)
Ω
Ω
7
7
5
5
G
G
ND  
ND  
AM  
AM  
ANTENNA  
ANTENNA  
Set it in the direction and position it to where you  
receive the clearest sound. Put it as far away as  
possible from the unit, televisions, speaker cables,  
and power cords.  
If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor  
antenna may improve the quality.  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
AC IN  
S-VIDEO  
( )  
4
(
)
(
)
2
(
)
DSS  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
REC/ZONE  
MONITOR OUT  
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
TV  
1
DVD  
VCR IN  
3
VCR OUT  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
C
R
/
P
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/P  
R
Y
(
)
L
SL  
C
SBL
T
TAPE  
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
OUTPUT 1  
O
DIGITAL IN  
B
L
IN  
4
1
5
2
R
3
R
AUX 2 7.1CH INPUT  
SR  
SW  
SBR  
O
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
(
)
Plug the power cable into an AC outlet.  
2.  
RS-232C  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
Press and hold down the lever of the AM antenna  
terminal.  
L
SL  
C
SBL  
1.  
)
75  
ANT  
GND AM  
R
L
R
L
UNSWITCHED  
1.25AA 150W  
MODEL NO  
Insert the bare wire into the antenna terminal.  
2.  
3.  
FRONT A  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25AA 150W  
AC IN  
R
SR  
SW  
SBR  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
PRE OUT  
Release the lever.  
Note:  
• Connect the shielded grounding wire (black) to the  
AM antenna GND terminal.  
ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA  
Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection  
line.  
Place the antenna on stable surface.  
CONNECTING THE FM OUTDOOR ANTENNA  
1.  
4.  
Notes:  
• Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon  
signs, busy roads, etc.).  
• Do not put the antenna close to power lines. Keep it  
well away from power lines, transformers, etc.  
• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,  
grounding is necessary.  
Bend the base part in the reverse direction.  
2.  
3.  
CONNECTING THE AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA  
The outdoor antenna will be more effective if it is  
stretched horizontally above a window or outside.  
Notes:  
• Do not remove the AM loop antenna.  
Insert the hook at the bottom of the loop part  
into the slot at the base part.  
• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,  
grounding is necessary.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
• As the input source is changed, the new input  
name will appear momentarily an OSD information  
on the video display. The input name will also  
appear in the display, on the front-panel.  
ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE)  
CONTROL  
TUNER OPERATION  
BASIC OPERATION  
AMP OPERATION  
To operate the unit from the remote controller, press  
the TUNE button on the remote controller so that the  
tuner mode is engaged.  
• If you use the FUNCTION RENAME feature (see  
page 28) , the renamed name appears on the  
display.  
TURNING ON THE UNIT  
LISTENING TO THE TUNER  
• As the input is changed, this unit will automatically  
switch to the digital input, surround mode,  
attenuation, and night mode status which were  
entered during the configuration process for that  
source.  
Frequency scan step for AM is selectable.  
Default setup is 10 kHz step, if your country’s  
standard is 9 kHz step, Press BAND button on the  
front panel or BAND button on the remote controller  
more than 5 seconds. Scan step will change.  
During a listening session you may wish to adjust the  
Bass and Treble Control to suit your listening tastes  
or room acoustics.  
• When a video source is selected, the selected  
video signal is output from the MONITOR OUT  
terminal.  
Note:  
(Using the remote controller)  
To adjust the tone, press the AMP button.  
To adjust the bass effect, press BASS + or BASS  
•
Preset memory for the tuner will clear by changing  
this setup.  
–
button  
To adjust the treble effect, TREBLE + or TREBLE  
button  
Notes:  
.
Connect the AC power cable to the wall outlet.  
1.  
2.  
AUTO TUNING  
ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME  
Turn the power of the equipment connected to  
this unit on.  
–
.
1.  
3. 2.  
Press the POWER ON/STANDBY button of  
3.  
• The tone control function is unavailable for the  
Source Direct, Pure Direct, Headphone, Dolby  
Virtual Speaker mode, and 176.4/192kHz PCM.  
this unit. Every time the button is pressed,  
the power to this unit toggles between on and  
standby.  
• The Tone control function is not available when M-  
DAX is being used.  
To activate power using the remote controller,  
press the AMP button, followed by the ON  
button and SOURCE ON/OFF button of the  
remote controller.  
• The tone control function is not available when  
ACOUSTIC EQ is being used.  
• Additionally, tone control is not available during  
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-HD  
playback.  
Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using  
the VOLUME control knob on the front panel or  
VOLUME + / – buttons on the remote controller.  
To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob  
clockwise or press VOLUME + button on the  
remote controller, to decrease the volume, turn  
counterclockwise or press VOLUME – button on the  
remote controller.  
1.  
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE  
TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND  
Before you can listen to any input media, you must  
first select the input source on the unit.  
Example : DVD  
3.  
2.  
Notes:  
• The volume can be adjusted within the range of – ∞  
and –71 to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.  
•
However, when the channel level is set as described on  
page 34, if the volume for any channel is set at +1 dB  
or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB.  
To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as  
when interrupted by a phone call, press the MUTE  
button on the remote controller.  
This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the  
head-phone jack, but it will not affect any recording or  
dubbing that may be in progress.  
When the system is muted, the display will show  
“MUTE” .  
Press the MUTE button again to return to normal  
operation.  
(Using the unit)  
(In this case the maximum volume adjustment range  
is “18 dB - Maximum value of channel level)  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
1.  
2.  
3.  
“TUNER”.  
To select DVD, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob  
on the front panel or press the DVD button on the  
remote controller two times in a row. After you have  
selected DVD, simply turn on the DVD player and  
play the DVD.  
Press the BAND button to select either FM or  
AM.  
Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front  
Panel for more than 1 second to start the auto  
tuning function.  
Automatic searching begins then stops when a  
station is tuned in.  
4.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
(Using the remote controller)  
MANUAL TUNING  
DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL  
(FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO)  
To select tuner, Press the TUNE button twice  
within two second on the remote controller.  
1.  
1.  
3. 2.  
Press the BAND button to select either FM or  
AM.  
1.  
2.  
Press and hold the TUNE  
second or more.  
3
or  
4
button for 1  
3.  
4.  
2.  
3
Automatic searching begins then stops when a  
station is tuned in.  
If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to  
the “Manual tuning” operation.  
When in the auto stereo mode, “AUTO” indicator will  
be illuminated on the display.  
The “ST” indicator is illuminated when a stereo  
broadcast is tuned in.  
4.  
1.  
At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the  
“TUNED” and “ST” indicators are not illuminated.  
If the signal is weak, it may be difficult to tune into the  
station in stereo. In such a case, Press the T-MODE  
button on the front panel or T.MODE button on the  
remote controller.  
“AUTO” indicator is not illuminated, if FM stereo  
broadcasts are received in monaural and the “ST”  
indicator is not illuminated.  
To return to auto stereo mode, Press the T-MODE  
button on the front panel or T.MODE button on  
the remote controller again. “AUTO” indicator is  
illuminated the display.  
To select tuner, Press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Press the BAND button to select either FM or  
AM.  
3.  
2.  
Press the F.DIRECT on the remote controller,  
display will show “FREQ----”.  
lnput your desired station’s, frequency with the  
ten numbered keypad on the remote controller  
.
The desired station will automatically be tuned.  
(Using the unit)  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
“TUNER”.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press the BAND button to select either FM or  
AM.  
Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front  
Panel to select the desired station.  
(Using the remote controller)  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
Press the BAND button to select either FM or  
AM.  
2.  
Press the TUNE  
deseired station.  
3
or 4 button to tune in the  
3.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION  
To control the unit by your remote controller, you have to select the device AMP, TUNER or DMP (USB) by pressing the SOURCE button. Please refer below for the details in AMP, TUNER or DMP (USB) mode.  
AMP MODE  
TUNER MODE  
DMP (USB) MODE  
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
POWER OFF Turns the SR6003 off  
HDMI  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
Shows preset information  
Tunes a frequency station up and  
down  
HDMI  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
Turns the SR6003 on and off  
ZONE A/B  
Z.SPKR  
A/D  
ZONE A/B  
Z.SPKR  
A/D  
POWER ON  
HDMI  
Turns the SR6003 on  
Selects the HDMI output  
ATT  
SPKR A/B  
7.1 IN  
ATT  
SPK A/B  
7.1 IN  
ZONE A/B  
Z.SPKR  
Turns on or off ZONE A or ZONE B  
Turns on or off ZONE Speaker A  
Switches between the analog or digital  
inputs  
SOURCE  
AMP  
SOURCE  
AMP  
A/D  
INPUT 3 / 4  
DISPLAY  
MUTE  
INPUT 3 / 4  
ATT  
SPKR A/B  
7.1  
Reduces the input level  
Selects the speaker system  
Selects the 7.1CH IN  
DISPLAY (PAGE-) Moves to the previous page  
MUTE AMP function enabled  
SURR (PAGE+) Moves to the next page  
SURR  
VOLUME+/–  
INFO  
SOURCE  
AMP  
Selects a particular source component  
Select AMP mode of remote unit  
Change the input selecter of SR6003  
Changes the front display mode  
Decreases the sound temporarily  
Selects the surround mode  
Adjusts the over all sound level  
Back to the TOP of SETUP MENU  
Displays the current setting on the  
monitor  
VOLUME+/-  
TOP  
AMP function enabled  
Moves to the highest folder  
Cursor movement/folder movement  
Moves to folders/plays files  
PAUSE  
INPUT 3 / 4  
DISPLAY  
MUTE  
Cursor  
ENTER  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
TUNE 3 / 4  
PRESET + 2/– 1 Selects a preset station up and down  
Enters the tuner preset memory  
SURR  
VOLUME+/-  
TOP  
PLAY  
STOP  
EXIT/MEMO  
numbers  
STOP  
Previous/Next Skips forward or previous file  
Rewind/Forward Searchs forward or backward  
T.TONE  
AMP function enabled  
INFO  
Selects the auto stereo mode or  
mono mode  
Starts preset scan  
T.MODE  
REPEAT  
Select REPEAT PLAY  
Select RANDOM PLAY  
Turns the TV on and off  
Select the TV video input  
Moves the cursor for setting in "SETUP  
MENU" mode  
Cursor  
ENTER  
RANDOM  
TV POWER  
TV INPUT  
P.SCAN  
BAND  
Selects a radio band  
SelectsthedisplaymodeinXMSatellite  
Confirms the setting in "SETUP MENU"  
mode  
T.DISP  
MENU  
EXIT  
Enters the "SETUP MENU"  
Exits from SETUP MENU  
Selects the MACRO mode.  
Selects auto surround  
Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
Selects the “Frequency direct input”  
Select the parental lock mode  
Inputs the numeric  
F.DIRECT  
P.LOCK  
0-9  
MACRO(M)  
AUTO(1)  
STEREO(2)  
P.DIRECT(3)  
SLEEP(4)  
M-DAX(5)  
EQ(6)  
Selects STEREO mode  
CL  
TV POWER  
TV INPUT  
Clears the inputting  
Turns the TV on and off  
Select the TV video input  
Selects the pure direct mode  
Sets the sleep timer function  
Selects the M-DAX mode  
Selects the EQ mode  
• The remote controller dose not have the  
PRESET code library for this device.  
LIP SYNC(7)  
NIGHT(8)  
V-OFF(9)  
T.TONE(CL)  
Selects the LIP SYNC mode  
Turns on or off NIGHT mode  
Turns on or off video output  
Enters the test tone menu  
Calls up CH LEVEL ADJUST and adjusts  
speaker levels or 7.1ch input level  
Turns the TV on and off  
CH SEL(0)  
TV POWER  
TV INPUT  
Select the TV video input  
Adjusts the tone control of high frequency  
sound  
TREBLE-/+  
BASS-/+  
Adjusts the tone control of low frequency  
sound  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
ADVANCED CONNECTIONS  
CONNECTING THE USB MEDIA  
CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO COMPONENTS  
Connect the USB media to the unit.  
The 7.1CH INPUT jacks are for multichannel audio source such as the Super Audio CD multichannel player,  
DVD audio player or external decoder.  
If you use these jacks, switch on the 7.1CH INPUT and set the 7.1CH INPUT level by using the SETUP MAIN  
MENU. See page 27.  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
CENTER  
FM  
75Ω  
(
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
L
S-VIDEO  
( )  
4
(
)
(
)
2
(
)
DSS  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CON  
REC/ZONE  
MONITOR OUT  
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
TV  
1
DVD  
VCR IN  
3
VCR OUT  
R
L
L
S
S
L
L
C
C
SB  
S
B
L
L
ZONE A  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
DIGITAL IN  
B
FRONT SURR. SURR.  
BACK  
SUB  
L
L
IN  
WOOFER  
4
1
5
2
R
R
3
R
R
UX  
UX  
SR SW  
SR SW  
7.1CH INPUT  
7.1CH INPUT  
SBR  
SBR  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
(
(
)
)
2
2
A
A
RS-232C  
SPEAKER C  
AC OUT  
120V  
OFF ON  
L
SL  
C
SBL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
UNSWIT  
1.25A 1  
Note:  
DVD Audio player  
or  
Super Audio CD  
Multi channel player  
Remove the USB media after turning off the power. If it is removed while the power is still supplied, its data may be  
lost and/or the USB media itself may be damaged.  
FRONT A  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEEAKER A  
SWITC  
1.25A 1  
R
SR  
SW  
SBR  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
PRE OUT  
Caution:  
When the USB devices are used, do not use the USB extension cable.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER  
CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE (BI-AMP CONNECTION)  
The PREOUT jacks are for connecting external power amplifier.  
Be sure to connect each speaker to the corresponding external power amplifier.  
A bi-amp connection is possible with speakers that have two sets of inputs (for treble and bass).  
This allows you to drive the treble and bass units with separate channel amps, which enables better sound  
quality. Connect the speakers as shown in the figure. Set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the rear panel  
to ON.  
Notes:  
• If incorrectly connected, a protective circuit in the unit will trip and set the unit to standby. (The STANDBY  
indicator will flash.) In such case, recheck the connections between the speakers and the unit.  
• Turn power to the unit off before changing the setting of the SPEAKER C selector switch.  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FM  
75Ω  
R
L
R
L
R
L
(
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
S-VIDEO  
( )  
4
(
1
)
(
)
2
(
)
DSS  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
REC/ZONE  
MONITOR OUT  
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
TV  
DVD  
VCR IN  
3
VCR OUT  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
C
R
/
P
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/P  
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/PR  
(
)
L
SL  
C
SBL ZONE A  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
FM  
75Ω  
DIGITAL IN  
B
(
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
L
IN  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
CENTER  
4
1
5
2
L
R
L
SL  
C
SBL ZONE A  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
3
R
AUX 2 7.1CH INPUT  
SR  
SW  
SBR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
L
(
)
R
RS-232C  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
FRONT SURR. SURR.  
BACK  
R
R
SR  
SW  
AUX 2 7.1CH INPUT  
SBR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
L
SL  
C
SBL  
(
)
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
RS-232C  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
Power  
MODEL NO.. SR6003  
8
C
H
POWER AMPLIFIER MM8003  
Amplifer  
LL  
S
S
L
L
CC  
SSBBLL  
FRONT A  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
R
L
R
L
AC IN  
R
SR  
SBR  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
S
TANDBY  
P
OWER  
ON/OFF  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
FRONT A  
FRONT B  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
R
R
SR  
SR  
SW  
SW  
SBR  
SBR  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OH  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
SPEAKE  
PRE  
PRE  
OUT  
O T  
U
Front  
Left  
Front  
Right  
Center  
L
R
L
R
L
R
Surround  
Left  
Surround  
Right  
Surround  
Back Left  
Surround  
Back Right  
RIGHT  
SPEAKER  
LEFT  
SPEAKER  
Powered  
Subwoofer  
Note:  
• You can use surround back speaker terminals as ZONE SPEAKERA. terminals or SPEAKER C terminal when you  
are not using surround back speakers.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CONNECTION FOR ANOTHER ZONE  
As shown in the diagram, a player connected to this unit in another ZONE can be used to play music and movies when used in combination with an amp from Marantz or other manufacturer.  
ZONE  
LEFT  
SPEAKER  
ZONE  
RIGHT  
SPEAKER  
RX3001  
OPT IN  
REMOTE OUT  
IR OUTPUT  
L
ES7001  
R
FRONT  
R
L
MAIN AMP  
(For ZONE)  
R
L
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FM  
75Ω  
(
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
INPUT 2(DVD) INPUT 3(VCR)  
RC3001  
INPUT 1(TV)  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
TV(1)  
DVD(2) VCR IN(3) VCR OUT  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR OUT  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
C
R
/
P
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/P  
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/PR  
(
)
L
SL  
C
SBL ZONE  
A
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
REC/ZONE B  
DIGITAL IN  
L
IN  
4
1
5
2
R
(ZONE speaker A)  
3
R
SR  
SW  
SBR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
(AUX 2) 7.1CH INPUT  
RS-232C  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
RC101  
RIGHT  
SPEAKER  
LEFT  
SPEAKER  
L
SL  
C
SBL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
UNSWITCHED  
1.25AA 150W  
MODEL NO. SR6003  
FRONT A  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKEER C//  
ZONE SPEAAKER AA  
SWITCHED  
1.25AA 150W  
AC IN  
R
SR  
SW  
SBR  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
PRE OUT  
ZONE B  
If Surround back speakers or SPEAKER C are not  
being used, the Surround Back Speaker terminals can  
be used for the ZONE SPEAKER A terminals.  
ZONE A  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS  
CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
a
2
(
)
( )  
DVD 2  
VCR IN  
(
3
)
VCR OUT  
DSS  
4
MONITOR OUT  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
C
R
/
P
R
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/  
PR  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/PR  
(
)
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
REC/ZONE B  
DIGITTAL IN  
IN  
5
2
INPUT  
RC OUT  
VIDEO  
3
FM  
75Ω  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
OPTION  
(
)
GND AM ANTENNA  
(
INPUT 1 TV  
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD  
)
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
S-VIDEO  
(
DSS 4  
)
( )  
TV 1  
( )  
( )  
DVD 2 VCR IN 3 VCR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
AUDIO  
CD/CDR  
Y
CB/P  
INPUT 2  
L
SL  
C
SBL ZONE A  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
DSS  
TAPE  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
DIGITAL IN  
REC/ZONE B  
L
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
MODEL NO. SSR6003  
L
IN  
4
1
5
2
OUND BACK  
EAKER C/  
SPEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
AC IN  
R
3
R
SR  
SW  
AUX 2 7.1CH INPUT  
SBR  
OUT DC OUT OUT  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
(
)
RS-232C  
SPEAKER C  
OFF ON  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
L
SL  
C
SBL  
1
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
CD recorder  
DVD player  
CD player  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
FRONT A  
FRONT B  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKER C/  
ZONE SPEEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
R
SR  
SW  
SBR  
FRONT A OR B,CENTER, SURR,SURR BACK : 6-8 OHMS  
FRONT A + B : 8 OHMS  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
PRE OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
s
d
a RS-232C  
q
w
Connect an external control device or other device for  
servicing. (Use a straight cable for the connection.)  
You can control other Marantz products through this  
unit with the remote controller by connecting the  
REMOTE CONTROL terminals on each unit.  
Whenever external infrared sensors or similar devices  
are connected to RC-5 IN of the unit, be sure to  
always disable operation of the infrared sensor on the  
unit by using the following procedure.  
The signal transmitted from the remote controller  
is received by the remote sensor on this unit. Then  
the signal is sent to the connected device through  
this terminal. Therefore you need to aim the remote  
control only at the unit. Also, if a Marantz power  
amplifier (some models excluded) is connected to  
one of these terminals, the power amplifier’s, power  
switch is synchronized with this unit’s power switch.  
s DC OUT (DC TRIGGER)  
External devices can be controlled from the unit  
by connecting them to the DC OUT terminal (12 V  
44mA max).  
Hold down the SURROUND MODE button  
and the MENU button on the front panel at the  
1.  
same time for five seconds.  
GND  
The setting “IR=ENABLE” is shown on the FL  
DISPLAY.  
2.  
+12V  
Press the CURSOR buttons (1, 2) to change  
this to “IR=DISABLE”.  
3.  
Set the REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH on the back of  
other units (not the SR6003) to “EXT.” (EXTERNAL)  
to use this feature.  
Press the ENTER button. Once this setting  
is made, the infrared sensor on the unit is  
disabled.  
4.  
d FLASHER IN  
This unit can be controlled by connecting a control  
box or other control device to this unit.  
Note:  
• Be sure to set to “IR=ENABLE” when external  
infrared sensors or similar devices are not connected.  
Otherwise, the unit will be unable to receive remote  
control commands.  
GND  
Signal  
To restore the original setting, perform steps 1  
to 4 to set to “IR=ENABLE”.  
5.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
XM SATELLITE RADIO  
CONNECTING THE SATELLITE RADIO  
• Plug the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock into XM terminal on the rear panel.  
• Position the XM antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal.  
Subscriptions are required in order to listen to both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio. For details  
on XM Satellite Radio, see page 53. For details on SIRIUS Satellite Radio, see page 58.  
When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.  
XM  
Note:  
This unit does not support the XM CNP-1000. See page 77.  
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO  
(
INPUT 3 VCR  
)
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
• Plug the SiriusConnectTM Home Tuner, Antenna and AC adapter into SIRIUS terminal on the rear panel.  
• Position the SIRIUS antenna for a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be positioned correctly. Use  
the following map to determine which area you are in and position the antenna accordingly.  
DSS(4)  
MONITOR OUT  
DVD(2) VCR IN(3) VCR OUT  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
C
R
/
P
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR  
/PR  
Y
C
B
/
P
B
CR/PR  
(
)
INPUT 2 DVD  
SIRIUS  
OUTPUT 1  
OUTPUT 2  
DIGITAL FLASHER IN REMOTE CONT.  
REC/ZONE B  
DIGITAL IN  
IN  
5
2
3
OUT DC OUT OUT  
(US)  
(Canada)  
AC OUTLETS  
120V 60Hz  
L
UNSWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
MODEL NO. SSR6003  
SKY  
SKY  
OUND BACK  
EAKER C/  
SPEAKER A  
SWITCHED  
1.25A 150W  
AC IN  
NORTH  
NORTH  
Antenna  
1
5
4
WEST  
WEST  
EAST  
EAST  
1
3
2
3
2
SOUTH  
SOUTH  
HORIZON  
HORIZON  
AC  
adapter  
TM  
AREA  
AREA 1  
AREA 2  
AREA 3  
AREA 4  
ANTENNA AIMING DIRECTION  
Aim the antenna EAST or NORTHEAST  
Aim the antenna NORTH or NORTHEAST  
Aim the antenna NORTH or NORTHWEST  
Aim the antenna WEST or NORTHWEST  
SiriusConnect  
Home Tuner  
AREA  
AREA 1  
AREA 2  
ANTENNA AIMING DIRECTION  
Aim the antenna EAST or SOUTHEAST  
Aim the antenna SOUTH or STRAIGHT UP at  
the sky (may require outdoor placement)  
Aim the antenna WEST or SOUTHWEST  
AREA 3  
Aim the antenna STRAIGHT UP at the sky (may  
require outdoor placement)  
AREA 5  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
RC003SR BUTTON CONTROL  
SETUP  
After all components are connected, initial setup  
must be performed.  
GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE MENU  
SYSTEM  
AMP (Amplifier) button  
UP button  
This unit incorporates the graphical user interface  
menu system, which makes various operations  
possible by using the cursor (3, 4, 1 , 2) and  
ENTER buttons on the remote controller or on the  
front panel.  
Note:  
•
To view the graphical user interface displays, make  
certain you have connected the MONITOR OUT  
jack on the rear panel to the composite, S-Video,  
component video or HDMI input of your TV or  
projector. (See page 13, 14)  
TOP button  
Pressing this button returns you to the  
Main MENU of the GUI menu system.  
ENTER button  
RIGHT button  
LEFT button  
Press the AMP button on the remote controller.  
(This step is not needed when operating the  
setup menus from the unit.)  
1.  
2.  
MENU button  
Press this button to display the GUI  
menu system.  
EXIT button  
Press this button to exit the GUI menu system.  
PresstheMENUbuttonontheremotecontroller  
or press the MENU button on the front panel.  
The “Main Menu” of the GUI menu system is  
displayed.  
There are 6 items in the “Main Menu”.  
Select the desired sub-menu with the 3 or  
4
3.  
cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.  
The display will change to the selected sub-  
menu.  
DOWN button  
<LOCKING SUBMENUS>  
(1) Move the cursor to “Input Setup” in the Main  
Menu.  
SR6003 FRONT BUTTON CONTROL  
(2) When the 1 or 2 cursor button is pressed to  
display the  
concerned is locked.  
(key) icon on an item, the item  
UP button  
To exit from the GUI menu system, press the  
EXIT button, or move the cursor to EXIT and  
press the ENTER button.  
4.  
MENU button  
Press this button to display the GUI  
menu system.  
EXIT button  
Press this button to exit the GUI menu system.  
LEFT button  
RIGHT button  
ENTER button  
DOWN button  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Note:  
• After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
Main Menu  
Main Menu  
Input Setup  
Speaker Setup  
Surround Setup  
Video Setup  
Preference  
cursor to “Return” with the 3 and 4 cursor buttons  
and press the ENTER button.  
Acoustic EQ.  
: Up / Down  
: Lock / Unlock  
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
Sub Menu  
Input Setup  
Preference  
Surround Setup  
Channel Level  
PL x Music Parameter  
CS Parameter  
NEO: 6 Parameter  
HT-EQ.  
Function Input Setup  
Zone A Setup  
Zone B Setup  
DC Trigger Setup  
Optical Output  
Standby Mode  
Audio  
7.1ch Input Setup  
Function Rename  
: Rec  
: Economy  
: Main  
Return  
: Off  
: 0dB  
: Off  
LFE Level  
: Enable  
: Disable  
M-DAX  
HDMI Audio  
HDMI Lip Sync  
Return  
Return  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
“1. Input Setup” (P. 26)  
“3. Surround Setup” (P. 34)  
“5. Preference” (P. 37)  
Acoustic EQ.  
Speaker Setup  
Auto Setup  
Video Setup  
: Off  
EQ. Mode  
Video Convert  
Preset Graphic EQ. Adjust  
Check Auto EQ.  
Manual Setup  
TV-Auto  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: Disable  
: Output1  
: Auto  
OSD Information  
Component I / P Convert  
HDMI Output  
Return  
Return  
HDMI Output Resolution  
Return  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
“2. Speaker Setup” (P. 28)  
“4. Video Setup” (P. 36)  
“6. Acoustic EQ.” (P. 39)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Input Setup  
1 INPUT SETUP  
Function Input Setup  
7.1ch Input Setup  
Function Rename  
This menu is for setting the matching the output of  
connected audio devices and the input jacks of this  
unit.  
Return  
•
•
•
Function Input Setup :  
“1-1 FUNCTION INPUT SETUP” (see page 27)  
7.1 ch Input Setup :  
“1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” (see page 27)  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
Function Rename :  
“1-3 FUNCTION RENAME” (see page 28)  
Select “Input Setup” from the Main Menu with  
1.  
3
or 4 cursor button, and press the ENTER  
P. 27  
Function Input Setup  
P. 27  
7.1ch Input Setup  
P. 28  
Function Rename  
☞
☞
☞
button.  
Function  
TV  
Mode  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Analog  
Digital  
HDMI  
Comp. S / Video  
Video-in  
: Last  
Function : TV  
Rename :T V  
Input Setup  
1
2
3
4
F
-
1
2
3
-
1
2
3
-
1
2
3
4
Front Left  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
Function Input Setup  
7.1ch Input Setup  
Function Rename  
DVD  
Center  
A
N
a
n
0
$
;
B
O
b
C
P
c
D
Q
d
q
3
'
E
R
e
r
F
S
f
G
T
g
t
H
U
h
u
7
+
]
I
V
i
J
W
j
K
X
k
x
!
L
Y
I
M
Z
m
z
VCR  
Front Right  
Surround Right  
DSS  
Return  
AUX1  
TAPE  
CD/R  
AUX2  
SIRIUS  
Return  
-
-
Surround Back Right : 0.0dB  
o
p
2
s
v
8
.
w
9
y
"
/
|
*
1
-
-
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
1
4
(
5
)
6
#
:
5
-
-
-
2
3
%
<
&
=
-
.
*
[
-
-
>
?
@
^
_
{
}
-
Space  
Backspace  
Default  
*
*
*
Return  
Return  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Return  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Select the desired sub-menu with the 3 or  
cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button.  
4
2.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
HDMI  
Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the  
device.  
1-1 FUNCTION INPUT SETUP  
(ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUT)  
1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP  
This menu is for adjusting the speaker levels for 7.1-  
channel input sources.  
Here you will adjust the volume for each channel so  
that they are all heard by the listener at the same  
level.  
The 5 and F (Front) digital inputs can be assigned to  
a desired source.  
HDMI and COMPONENT inputs can be assigned to  
the preferred source.  
Use this menu to select which digital input jacks are  
to be assigned to which input source.  
Note:  
• When FUNCTION MODE is set to HDMI and  
HDMI AUDIO of “5. PREFERENCE” is set to  
Through, audio is not output from the unit. (See page  
38)  
Select “7.1 ch Input Setup” from the Input  
Setup menu with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and  
1.  
Comp  
Assign the number of a component video input  
jack to the device.  
Select “Function Input Setup” from the Input  
Setup menu with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button.  
1.  
7.1ch Input Setup  
press the ENTER button.  
Video-in  
: Last  
S/Video  
Front Left  
Center  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
Function Input Setup  
Assign the number of a composite video and S-  
video input jack to the device.  
Function  
TV  
Mode  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Analog  
Digital  
HDMI  
Comp. S / Video  
Front Right  
Surround Right  
1
2
3
4
F
-
1
2
3
-
1
2
3
-
1
2
3
4
DVD  
Note:  
Surround Back Right : 0.0dB  
VCR  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
• Video and S-video can use the same numbers when  
assigning to input functions.  
DSS  
AUX1  
TAPE  
CD/R  
AUX2  
SIRIUS  
Return  
-
-
*
1
-
-
• The ✽ mark in AUX1 indicates that other inputs  
cannot be assigned.  
5
-
-
-
2
3
Return  
-
-
-
*
*
*
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Press the ENTER button.  
3.  
4.  
Select “Video-in” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Return  
Exit : Exit  
2.  
3.  
Select each mode setting and input terminal  
with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the  
video input source to be played through the  
MONITOR OUT jack.  
Press the ENTER button.  
5.  
6.  
Select a setting with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor  
buttons, and assign a mode and input jack  
(Digital, HDMI, Comp, S/Video).  
2.  
Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.  
Note:  
The input source is switched by pressing the  
MODE  
• Assignments cannot be made in sections with a ✽  
mark.  
1
or 2 cursor buttons as follows;  
Auto:  
Last ↔ TV ↔ DVD ↔ VCR ↔ DSS ↔ AUX1  
↔ TAPE ↔ CD/R ↔ AUX2 ↔ Video-off ↔  
Last ↔...  
Select “Auto”, for automatic detection of the digital  
input signal condition.  
If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog  
signal present, the analog signal will be played.  
“Auto” is the initial setting of all input sources.  
Notes:  
When “Last” is selected, the source is set to the source  
selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was activated.  
• When Video-off” is selected, no signal is emitted  
•
HDMI:  
Select “HDMI”, when only a HDMI signal will be  
“
used  
.
from MONITOR OUT jack.  
Digital:  
Select “Digital”, when only a digital signal will be  
used.  
Select desired channel with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
4.  
5.  
Analog:  
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, adjust the  
volume level of each channel.  
Select “Analog” for input sources for which no  
digital input jacks are used.  
Move the cursor to “Return” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2  
cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button to go to  
the Input Setup menu.  
Digital  
5 and F(Front) digital inputs can be assigned to a  
desired source.  
Assign the number of a digital input jack to the  
device.  
Note:  
• The volume level can be set between -12 dB and  
+12 dB in 1 dB increments on all channels except  
the subwoofer (SUB W), which can be set from  
-18dB to +12 dB in 1 dB increments.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
1-3 FUNCTION RENAME  
Repeat steps 5-8 until the new name is input.  
9.  
Input sources can be registered under any name.  
This menu is for renaming input source.  
Space:  
Inserts a space at the cursor point of the “Rename”  
This menu is for renaming function name. Names  
can be up to 10 characters long, including spaces.  
(Characters are selected from those appearing on  
the display.) This name appears on the unit's FL  
display and the GUI, but it does not appear in the  
GUI Setup menu.  
area.  
Backspace:  
Deletes the character left of the cursor in the  
“Rename” area one character at a time.  
Default:  
Restores the name in the “Rename” area to the  
name in the “Function” area.  
Select “Function Rename” from the Input  
Setup menu with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and  
1.  
Note:  
press the ENTER button.  
• Rename cannot be left blank.  
Function Rename  
Function : TV  
Move the cursor to “Return” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2  
cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to go to  
the Input Setup menu.  
Rename :T V  
A
N
a
n
0
$
;
B
O
b
C
P
c
D
Q
d
q
3
'
E
R
e
r
F
S
f
G
T
g
t
H
U
h
u
7
+
]
I
V
i
J
W
j
K
X
k
x
!
L
Y
I
M
Z
m
z
o
p
2
s
v
8
.
w
9
y
"
/
|
1
4
(
5
)
6
#
:
%
<
&
=
-
.
*
[
>
?
@
^
_
{
}
Space  
Backspace  
Default  
Return  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Select “Function” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
2.  
Select an input source with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
3.  
4.  
Select “Rename” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
Move the cursor to the character (1st to 10th) to  
change with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
5.  
6.  
Move the cursor to the character list with the 4  
cursor button. (Move the cursor to the letter “A”  
to begin with.)  
Select a character with the 3, 4, 1, and 2  
cursor buttons.  
7.  
8.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the selected  
letter.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Speaker Setup  
Auto Setup  
2 SPEAKER SETUP  
Manual Setup  
After you have installed the unit connected all the  
components and determined the speaker layout, it  
is now time to perform the settings in the Speaker  
Setup menu for the optimum sound acoustics for  
your environment and speaker layout.  
Before you perform the following settings, it is  
important that you first determine the following  
characteristics:  
Return  
P. 33  
☞
Manual Setup  
Speakers Size  
Speakers Distance  
Speakers Level  
Return  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
•
Auto Setup:  
“2-1 AUTO SETUP (Audyssey MultEQ®)”  
(see page 30)  
•
Manual Setup:  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
“2-2 MANUAL SETUP” (see page 33)  
P. 30  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
StartManual Setup  
☞
Select “Speaker Setup” from the Main Menu  
with 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
ENTER button.  
1.  
Speakers Size  
Subwoofer  
Front  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
Now Analyzing!!  
: Yes  
: Small  
: Small  
: Small  
: 2ch  
Main Zone Surround Back  
: 2ch  
Center  
Cancel  
Speaker Setup  
Auto Setup  
Surround  
Surround Back  
Return  
Manual Setup  
Surround Back Size  
LPF / HPF  
: Small  
: 80Hz  
: * * *  
Return  
Bass Mix  
Return  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Enter :  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Exit : Exit  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : OK  
Exit : Exit  
:
:
Enter : OK  
Exit : Exit  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
Speaker Check :  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
Speakers Distance  
Unit  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
: Feet  
--  
--------------  
Now Calculating!  
Front Left  
: 10.0 ft  
: 10.0 ft  
: 10.0 ft  
: 10.0 ft  
1st Mic Position  
Now Analyzing!!  
Center  
Front Right  
Surround Right  
Select the desired menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons, and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
Cancel  
Surround Back Right : 10.0 ft  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
: 10.0 ft  
: 10.0 ft  
: 10.0 ft  
Note:  
• After you complete this the portion of the setup,  
press the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor button. The cursor  
will move to “Return” and press the ENTER button  
to go to the Sub-menu.  
Return  
:
:
Enter : OK  
Exit : Exit  
:
:
Enter :  
Exit :  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
Speaker Check : OK  
2nd Mic Position  
Check Result  
Speakers Level  
Test ModeFront Left  
Front Left  
Speakers Config  
Speakers Size  
Speakers Distance  
Channel Level  
Crossover Frequency  
Store  
: Manual  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
Center  
Start  
Front Right  
Check  
Surround Right  
Calculate  
Surround Back Right : 0.0dB  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
Return  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : OK  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
2-1 AUTO SETUP (Audyssey MultEQ®)  
Notes:  
• Up to 6 positions around the main listening position  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
StartManual Setup  
Speakers Config  
Check Speaker Results  
Front Left  
AUTO SETUP (performed by Audyssey MultEQ)  
automatically measures the acoustical problems in  
the listening environment and optimizes settings to  
create the best audio experience for your listening  
environment.  
Main Zone Surround Back  
: 2ch  
: Yes  
: No  
: Yes  
: Yes  
: No  
: No  
: Yes  
: Yes  
can be measured.  
Center  
For the first measurement, set the microphone in the  
main listening position.  
Return  
Front Right  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
• Use a stand or tripod to position the microphone  
at ear height for all listening positions measured  
with the microphone tip pointing directly up to the  
ceiling.  
Audyssey MultEQ removes frequency response  
anomalies caused by the interaction of sound  
from loudspeakers within the room. This results in  
the playback of sound as it was intended, without  
coloration, not just in one seat, but over a large  
listening area.  
Audyssey MultEQ measures up to 6 listening  
positions in the room and detects the presence  
of each speaker and automatically calculates the  
speaker size, channel level, distance, and optimal  
crossover frequency settings.  
Return  
• Remove any obstructions between the speakers and  
microphone.  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : OK  
Exit : Exit  
:
:
Enter : Return  
Exit : Exit  
• When using a powered subwoofer, set the level  
knob to the middle or 12 o'clock position. Set the  
crossover to off, or to its highest value.  
“1st Mic Position Check”  
5.  
Ifthecheckresultsindicateanerror,takesuitable  
action with that item and remeasure. (For error  
messages, see “ERROR MESSAGES” on  
page 32.)  
The main listening position refers to the most  
central position where one would normally  
sit within the listening environment. MultEQ  
uses the measurements from this position  
to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity,  
and the optimum crossover value for the  
subwoofer.  
Ifthe subwooferhas a standby, orsleepmode, disable  
it. Not doing so could affect the test signal which  
may result in inaccurate subwoofer measurements.  
After confirming the check results, select  
“Return” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press  
the ENTER button to return to the GUI menu.  
• During measurements, do not stand between the  
microphone and the speakers. Make the room as  
quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt  
the room measurements. Close windows, silence  
cell phones, televisions, radios, air conditioners,  
fluorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers,  
or other devices.  
To set up the speaker system (i.e., adjusting speaker  
distance, etc.) without using the AUTO SETUP feature,  
see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 33 of the manual.  
At this point, you can select “Exit” to end Auto  
Setup and return to “Speaker Setup”.  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
Speaker Check :  
--  
1st Mic Position  
Now Analyzing!!  
Note:  
HOW TO PERFORM AUTO SETUP  
During measurement, the GUI menu displays the  
condition, therefore turn power to the monitor on.  
Cell phones should be placed away from all audio  
electronics during the measurement process as  
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) may cause  
measurement disruptions (even if the cell phone is  
not in use).  
• Auto Setup is not available in Pure Direct, Source  
Direct, or 7.1 Channel Input modes.  
Cancel  
Connect the supplied microphone to the  
SETUP MIC jack on the unit.  
1.  
Move the microphone to the 2nd listening  
position, select “Start” with the 3/4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button to  
measure the 2nd point. At this point, you  
can cancel second point measurement and  
calculate measurement results by selecting  
“Calculate” and pressing the ENTER button.  
7.  
It is suggested to operate the AUTO SETUP via the  
remote controller rather than by front panel.  
• The test tones played through each channel increase  
level as needed in order to overcome ambient noise  
present in the listening environment and obtain the  
best signal to noise ratio.  
:
:
Enter : OK  
Exit : Exit  
Note:  
• The Speakers Check detects the presence of  
connected speakers. If a channel is not used, the  
SPEAKERS CHECK will try to detect it, then  
continue to the next channel.  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
Select “Speaker Setup” from the Main Menu,  
select “Auto Setup” with the 3/4 cursor  
buttons, and press the ENTER button to  
display the start screen.  
3.  
4.  
Speaker Check : OK  
2nd Mic Position  
Start  
Check  
When the 1st Mic Position Check ends, the  
following GUI appears on the display.  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
6.  
Set the microphone in the main listening  
position.  
Calculate  
2.  
Select the number of channels for the surround  
back speaker you are using.  
Speaker Check : OK  
2nd Mic Position  
For a 5.1 channel speaker system, select “No”  
(Surround Back speaker off). (To use speaker  
C or Zone speaker, select “No”. See page 20,  
38.)  
Start  
Check  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : OK  
Exit : Exit  
Calculate  
Select “Start” with the 3/4 cursor buttons  
and press the ENTER button to start  
measurement.  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : OK  
Exit : Exit  
Here, to view the results of the detection check,  
select “Check” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button. The results will be  
displayed.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
[Example] Confirmation screen for the distance from  
Repeat steps 7 until measuring 6 points  
between the main listening position and  
surrounding positions.  
Checking Measurement Results  
Storing Measurement Results in Memory  
8.  
9.  
10.  
speakers to the listening position  
When calculations for the measurement results  
end, a screen appears for confirming the  
calculation results.  
Once finished confirming the measurement  
results, select “Return” with the 3/4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button to display  
the Check Result screen.  
Speakers Distance  
Unit  
: Feet  
When all measurements end, the following GUI  
appears on the display.  
Front Left  
: 30.0 ft  
: 19.3 ft  
: 29.6 ft  
: 21.5 ft  
: 12.3 ft  
: 11.6 ft  
: 16.3 ft  
: 12.5 ft  
Center  
Check Result  
Front Right  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
Speakers Config  
Speakers Size  
Speakers Distance  
Channel Level  
Crossover Frequency  
Store  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
Check Result  
Speaker Check : OK  
Speakers Config  
Speakers Size  
Speakers Distance  
Channel Level  
Crossover Frequency  
Store  
Calculate  
Return  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Return  
Exit : Exit  
* The units can be changed by moving the cursor  
to Meters of Unit and pressing 1 / 2 the cursor  
buttons.Each time a 1 / 2 cursor button is pressed,  
the units alternate between Feet and Meters.  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
:
:
Enter : OK  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : OK  
Exit : Exit  
Select items to check with the 3/4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button to enter  
them.  
Select “Calculate” with the 3/4 cursor buttons  
and press the ENTER button to calculate  
measurement results. During calculations, the  
following GUI appears on the display.  
Place the cursor on “Store” and press  
the ENTER button to store all parameters  
including the equalizer parameters in memory.  
If not wanting to store the calculation results in  
memory, press the Exit button.  
Note:  
This system cannot measure a distance of 9.15 m  
(30.0 ft) or higher. In this case, >9.15 m (>30.0 ft) is  
displayed.  
Note:  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
--------------  
Now Calculating!  
To check equalizer (MultEQ) parameters, see page  
40.  
[Example] Confirmation screen for channel level.  
Note:  
[Example] Confirmation screen for speaker detection  
Channel Level  
Pressing “Exit” prior to pressing “Store” erases all  
measurement results and calculation results, therefore  
operate the remote controller with care.  
Front Left  
:
:
:
:
:
0.0dB  
-6.5dB  
-1.5dB  
+1.0dB  
+9.5dB  
Speakers Config  
Center  
Check Speaker Results  
Front Right  
Front Left  
: Yes  
: No  
: Yes  
: Yes  
: No  
: No  
: Yes  
: Yes  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
Center  
When storing operations end, the following GUI  
appears on the display.  
Front Right  
: +12.0dB  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
:
:
-2.5dB  
-12.5dB  
Speaker Setup  
Auto Setup  
:
:
Enter :  
Exit :  
Return  
Manual Setup  
Note:  
Return  
Return  
• Fewer than 6 positions may be measured, but it  
is recommended to measure in all 6 positions for  
best results. Measuring in just one position is  
not recommended as it does not provide enough  
acoustical information to the MultEQ algorithm.  
:
:
Enter : Return  
Exit : Exit  
:
:
Enter : Return  
Exit : Exit  
[Example] Confirmation screen for crossover  
frequency.  
[Example] Confirmation screen for speaker size.  
• The time needed to complete calculations depends  
on the number of connected speakers and measured  
listening positions. The more speakers and listening  
positions, the more time is needed.  
Crossover Frequency  
Speakers Size  
Front  
: Auto  
: Auto  
: Auto  
: Auto  
Front Left  
: Auto  
: Auto  
: Auto  
: Auto  
: Auto  
: Auto  
: Auto  
Center  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
Center  
Surround  
Surround Back  
Front Right  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Notes:  
Return  
• Do not turn the power to the unit off while storing  
parameters in memory. This may erase all data in the  
unit’s memory and may damage the unit.  
Return  
:
:
Enter : Return  
Exit : Exit  
:
:
Enter : Return  
Exit : Exit  
* Auto is displayed to indicate that the speaker size  
andcrossoverfrequencyresultswereautomatically  
measured.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
ERROR MESSAGES  
Displayed Error  
Cause  
How to Remedy  
• Connect the included microphone.  
Mic Setup Error!!  
• The microphone is not properly connected.  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
• Check the microphone connection.  
StartManual Setup  
Main Zone Surround Back  
: 2ch  
Return  
Mic Setup Error  
Check Microphone  
:
:
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Exit : Exit  
Exit : Exit  
Noise Error!!  
• There is too much noise in the listening room to measure properly.  
• Volume from the speakers is low.  
• During measurement, turn off devices that make noise such as air  
conditioners.  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
Speaker Check :  
* *  
• Measure at a time when the surrounding area is quiet.  
Noise Error!!  
:
:
Enter :  
Analyze Error!!  
• The speakers required for suitable playback were not detected.  
• Speaker polarity is connected backwards.  
• Check the speaker that is indicated as having reversed polarity  
Audyssey MultEQ Setup  
Speaker Check :  
([Rev] can appear with some speakers even when properly  
connected. In such case, ignore the error indication.)  
* *  
Analyze Error!!  
• Check speaker direction and layout  
Result  
Return  
In the examples at left, the following trouble is detected.  
• The polarity of the left and right channels of the front speakers is  
backwards ([Rev] appears on the display.)  
• The surround speaker is not connected ([No] is displayed), but the  
surround back speaker is connected  
(In this kind of situation, [Err] is displayed for all surround and  
surround back speakers.)  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Return  
* Under Analyze Error, select “Result” with the 3/4 cursor buttons  
and press the ENTER button. A detail screen like the following  
appears on the display.  
An error is indicated in addition to the above if the speakers are  
connected as follows.  
Speakers Config  
Check Speaker Results  
• When using just one surround back speaker, but it is connected to  
the surround back R-channel  
Front Left  
: Yes  
: No  
: Yes  
: No  
: Yes  
: Yes  
: No  
: Yes  
Rev  
Rev  
Center  
Front Right  
(To use just one surround back speaker, connect it to the L-  
channel.)  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
Err  
Err  
Err  
Err  
Rev  
Return  
:
:
Enter : Return  
Exit : Exit  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Zone SPKR:  
Select if using the SURROUND BACK SPEAKER  
terminal as ZONE SPEAKER A.  
2-2 MANUAL SETUP  
<SPEAKER DISTANCE>  
Select each speaker with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
6.  
7.  
Select “Speaker Setup” from the Main Menu.  
Select Speaker Distance with the 3 or 4 cursor  
button from the Manual Setup menu, and press  
the ENTER button.  
1.  
2.  
9.  
Set the size of each speaker with the 1 or  
2
Notes:  
Select “Manual Setup” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
cursor buttons.  
buttons.  
• If “No” is selected for the Surround setting, then this  
setting is fixed to “No.”  
Speakers Distance  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Subwoofer  
Yes:  
Select when a subwoofer is connected.  
No:  
3.  
Unit  
: Feet  
Front Left  
Center  
: 10.0 ft  
: 10.0 ft  
: 10.0 ft  
: 10.0 ft  
Surround Back Size  
Large:  
Select if the surround back speakers are large.  
Small:  
Manual Setup  
Speakers Size  
Speakers Distance  
Speakers Level  
Front Right  
Surround Right  
Select when a subwoofer is not connected.  
Surround Back Right : 10.0 ft  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
: 10.0 ft  
: 10.0 ft  
: 10.0 ft  
Select if the surround back speakers are small.  
Return  
Front  
Large:  
Note:  
• If “None” is selected for the Surround setting, then  
this setting is not available.  
Return  
Select if the front speakers are large.  
Small:  
Select if the front speakers are small.  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
LPF/HPF  
• If “No” is selected for the subwoofer setting, then  
this setting is fixed at “Large”.  
Use this menu to specify the distance of each  
speaker’s position from the listening position. The  
delay time is automatically calculated according to  
these distances.  
Begin by determining the ideal or most commonly  
used seating position in the room.  
This is important for the timing of the acoustics to  
create the proper sound space that the unit and  
today’s sound systems are able to produce.  
When you use a subwoofer, you can select the cutoff  
frequency for the small speakers used. Select one of  
the crossover frequency levels according to the size  
of the small speakers connected.  
60Hz → 80Hz → 100Hz → 120Hz → 140Hz →  
160Hz → 180Hz  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
Select the sub-menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
button, and press the ENTER button.  
Center  
None:  
Select if no center speaker is connected.  
Large:  
Select if the center speaker is large.  
Small:  
Select if the center speaker is small.  
4.  
<SPEAKER SIZE>  
Note:  
Select Speaker Size with the 3 or 4 cursor  
button from the Manual Setup menu, and press  
5.  
• If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher  
frequency. If using large front speakers, set a slightly  
lower frequency.  
Note:  
the ENTER button.  
• For speakers for which you have selected “None”,  
the speaker configuration sub-menu will not appear  
here.  
Surround  
None:  
Speakers Size  
Bass Mix  
Subwoofer  
Front  
: Yes  
: Small  
: Small  
: Small  
: 2ch  
• The bass mix setting is only valid when “Large” is  
set for the front speakers and “Yes” is set for the  
subwoofer during stereo playback.  
Select if no surround left and right speakers are  
connected.  
Large:  
Select if the surround left and right speakers are  
large.  
Small:  
Center  
Select either Meters or Feet for Unit with the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons.  
Surround  
10.  
Surround Back  
Surround Back Size  
LPF / HPF  
: Small  
: 80Hz  
: * * *  
This setting has effect only during playback of  
PCM or analog stereo sources.  
Select each speaker with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
11.  
Bass Mix  
• When “Both” is selected, the low frequencies will  
be played through the main L&R speakers and the  
subwoofer.  
Select if the surround left and right speakers are  
small.  
Return  
Set the distance for each speaker , press the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons.  
12.  
In this playback mode, the low frequency range  
expands more uniformly throughout the room, but  
depending on the size and shape of the room,  
interference may result in a decrease of the actual  
volume of the low frequency range.  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Front Left:  
Surround Back  
None:  
Select if no surround back left and right speakers  
are connected.  
1ch:  
Select if one surround back speaker is connected.  
In this case, the audio signal is emitted from the  
SURR BACK LEFT SPEAKER terminal.  
2ch:  
Select if the surround back left and right speakers  
are connected.  
Set the distance from the front left speaker to your  
normal listening position.  
Center:  
Set the distance from the center speaker to your  
normal listening position.  
Front Right:  
Set the distance from the front right speaker to  
your normal listening position.  
Surround Left:  
Set the distance from the surround left speaker to  
your normal listening position.  
Surround Right:  
When setting the speaker size in the Speaker Size  
menu, use the guidelines below.  
Large:  
• By selecting “Mix”, the low frequencies will play  
through the main L&R only.  
The complete frequency range for the channel you  
are setting will be output from the speaker.  
Small:  
Frequencies of the channel you are setting that  
are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output from  
the subwoofer.  
If the Subwoofer is set to “No” and the front  
speakers are set to “Large,” then the sound will be  
output from both the left and right speakers.  
Note:  
• LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or  
DTS will be played through the subwoofer.  
After you complete this portion of the setup,  
8.  
Set the distance from the surround right speaker to  
your normal listening position.  
move the cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4  
cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to  
display the Manual Setup screen.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Subwoofer:  
Note:  
• The speaker level settings are not available in 7.1  
Notes:  
• Speakers for which you selected “None” in the  
Set the distance from the subwoofer to your  
normal listening position.  
Surround Back Left:  
Set the distance from the surround back left  
speaker to your normal listening position.  
Surround Back Right:  
Set the distance from the surround back right  
speaker to your normal listening position.  
Channel Input mode, Pure Direct mode and Source  
Direct mode.  
Speaker Size menu will not appear.  
• Surround Back Left and Surround Back Right  
appear if it is set for two surround back speakers in  
the Speaker Size menu.  
Test tone:  
Select “Manual” or “Auto” generation of the test  
tone with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
• Surround Back appears if it is set for one surround  
back speaker in the Speaker Size menu.  
• To adjust the speaker levels for 7.1 channel input  
sources, you will need to use the 7.1 ch Input sub  
menu. (See page 27)  
Notes:  
If you select “Auto”, the test tone will be cycled  
through in a circular pattern beginning at Front Left  
→ Center → Front Right → Surround Right →  
Surround Back Right → Surround Back Left →  
Surround Left → Subwoofer → Front Left, in 2  
seconds increments for each channel.  
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, adjust the volume  
level of the noise from the speaker so that it is the  
same level for all the speakers.  
• Set the distance to each speaker in meters (m) or feet  
(ft) as follows.  
• Subwoofer can be set from –18dB to +12dB.  
m: 0.03 - 9.15 m in 0.03 m steps  
ft: 0.1 - 30.0 ft in 0.1 ft steps  
(The values appearing on the FL display are  
approximate.)  
• For the speakers that you have selected “No” the  
speaker size menu will not appear.  
• The setting for Surround Back Left and Surround  
Back Right appears if it is set, two surround back  
speakers in the Speaker Size menu.  
If you select “Manual”, adjust the output level of each  
speaker as listed below.  
• The setting of Surround Back appears if it is set  
for one surround back speaker in the Speaker Size  
menu.  
Move the cursor to Front Left by pressing the  
4 cursor button. This unit will emit a pink noise  
from the front left speaker.  
15.  
Remember the level of this noise and then  
press the 4 cursor button.  
After you complete this portion of the setup,  
13.  
move the cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4  
cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to  
display the Manual Setup screen.  
(Note that this can be adjusted to any level  
between -12 and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.)  
This unit will now emit the pink noise from the  
center speaker.  
<SPEAKERS LEVEL>  
Using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons, adjust the  
16.  
Select Speakers Level with the 3 or 4 cursor  
volume level of the noise from the center  
speaker so that it is the same level as the front  
left speaker.  
14.  
button from the Manual Setup menu, and press  
the ENTER button.  
Speakers Level  
Press the 4 cursor button again. This unit will  
now emit the pink noise from the front right  
speaker.  
17.  
Test ModeFront Left  
Front Left  
: Manual  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
Center  
Front Right  
Repeat steps 17 and 18 for the front right and  
other speakers until all speakers are adjusted  
to the same volume level.  
18.  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right : 0.0dB  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
After you complete this portion of the setup, press the  
ENTER button to move the cursor to “Return”. Press  
the ENTER button to go to “Manual Setup”.  
Return  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Here you can set the volume for each speaker so that  
they are all heard by the listener at the same level.  
We recommend holding a dB SPL (Sound Pressure  
Level) meter at the listening position, at arms length,  
and pointing straight up at the ceiling, adjust the level  
of each speaker in turn unit it reads 75dB SPL when  
the meter is set to “C” weighting and Slow responce.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
M-DAX:  
3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL  
3 SURROUND SETUP  
Select the desired M-DAX mode.  
Select “High”, “Low” or “Off” with the 1 or 2 cursor  
button. (See page 44)  
Select “Surround Setup” from Main Menu with  
1.  
This menu is for setting surround effect parameters  
for the various surround input signals so as to bring  
out the live audio effect of your speaker system.  
3
or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER  
button.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move the  
cursor to “Return” with the 3, 4 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button.  
•
•
•
•
Channel level:  
“3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL” (see page 35)  
Select “Channel Level” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
3.  
PLIIx Music Parameter:  
“3-2 PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER” (see page 36)  
Set the Surround Mode with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
CSII Parameter:  
“3-3 CSII PARAMETER” (see page 36)  
Channel Level  
Surround Mode  
: Auto  
Center  
NEO:6 Parameter:  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
“3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER” (see page 36)  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
Surround Setup  
Channel Level  
PL x Music Parameter  
CS Parameter  
NEO: 6 Parameter  
HT-EQ.  
Select “Surround Setup” from the Main Menu  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
1.  
ENTER button.  
Return  
: Off  
: 0dB  
: Off  
LFE Level  
Select the desired menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
M-DAX  
Return  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Surround Setup  
Channel Level  
PL x Music Parameter  
CS Parameter  
Select the desired menu item with the 3 or  
4
4.  
cursor buttons, set the desired level with the  
or 2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER  
button.  
NEO: 6 Parameter  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
HT-EQ.  
: Off  
LFE Level  
M-DAX  
1
: 0dB  
: Off  
P. 35  
Channel Level  
Surround Mode  
Center  
P. 36  
CS Parameter  
TrubassCenter  
SRS Dialog  
☞
☞
Return  
Surround Mode:  
The surround mode can be independently set for  
3 modes.  
: Auto  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0.0dB  
: 0  
: 0  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
1. Multi Ch STEREO  
2. CSII  
3. Others  
Return  
HT-EQ.:  
Select to active the HT-EQ with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
Return  
CHANNEL LEVEL  
The total balance of a film soundtrack will be  
excessively bright and harsh when played back  
over audio equipment in the home.This is because  
film soundtracks were designed to be played back  
in large movie theater environments.  
Activating the HT-EQ feature when watching a film  
made for movie theaters corrects this and restores  
the correct tonal balance.  
The HT-EQ feature is available except in the  
following modes.  
• 7.1 CH INPUT  
• PURE DIRECT  
• SOURCE DIRECT  
Center:  
Set the effect level of the center speaker between  
–12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
• If “None” was selected for the center speaker  
setting in the Speaker Size, then this setting will not  
appear.  
Surround Left or Right:  
Set the effect level of the Surround speaker  
between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
P. 36  
PL x Music Parameter  
ParameterCenter  
Panorama  
P. 36  
NEO: 6 Parameter  
Center Gain  
☞
☞
: Default  
: Off  
: 0  
: 0.3  
Dimension  
Return  
Center Width  
: 3  
• If “None” was selected for the surround speakers  
setting in the Speaker Size, then this setting will not  
appear.  
Return  
• Dolby Head Phone  
• When VIRTUAL is set for the surround mode  
Surround Back Left or Right:  
Set the effect level of the Surround Back speaker  
between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
LFE Level:  
Select the output level of the LFE signal included in  
the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal.  
Select “0dB”, “–10 dB” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2  
cursor button.  
• If “None” was selected for the surround back  
speakers setting in the Speaker Size, then this setting  
will not appear.  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Subwoofer:  
Center Width:  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button.  
3-2 PLIIx (PRO LOGIC IIx) MUSIC PARAMETER  
Set the effect level of the subwoofer speaker  
between –18 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
Set the Center Width level between 0 and 7 in 1  
level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
Center width allows you to gradually spread the  
center channel sound into the front left and right  
speakers.  
At its widest setting, all the sound from the center  
is mixed into the left and right speakers.  
This control may help achieve a more spacious  
sound or a better blend for the front image.  
If “None” was selected for the center speaker  
setting in the Speaker Size menu, this setting  
cannot be selected.  
Pro LogicIIx-Music mode creates a rich and  
enveloping surround ambience from stereo sources  
such as CDs.  
In this mode, this unit includes three controls to fine-  
tune the sound field as follows.  
• If “No” was selected for the subwoofer speaker  
setting in the Speaker Size, then this setting will not  
appear.  
Note:  
• This parameter can only be set in the CSIImode.  
Note:  
• Setting to a mode other than multichannel stereo or  
CSIIwill affect the speaker level as explained in “2-2  
MANUAL SETUP”.  
Select “Surround Setup” in Main Menu with  
1.  
3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER  
3
or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER  
button.  
The DTS NEO:6 mode enables a maximum 6.1  
channel output with just 2 channel input. (It also  
supports 5.1 channel input.)  
This mode expands the sound image from the center  
channel.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
the cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons  
and press the ENTER button to go to the Surround  
Setup menu.  
Select “PLIIx Music Parameter” with the 3 or  
4 cursor buttons.  
2.  
3.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Select “Surround Setup” from Main Menu  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
1.  
3-3 CSII PARAMETER  
PL x Music Parameter  
ENTER button.  
ParameterCenter  
Panorama  
: Default  
: Off  
: 0  
Select “Surround Setup” from Main Menu  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
1.  
Dimension  
Center Width  
Select “NEO:6 Parameter” with the 3 or  
cursor buttons.  
4
: 3  
2.  
3.  
ENTER button.  
Return  
Select “CS II Parameter” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
2.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
NEO: 6 Parameter  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Center Gain  
Return  
: 0.3  
3.  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Parameter:  
CS Parameter  
TrubassCenter  
SRS Dialog  
: 0  
: 0  
Select “Default” or “Custom” with the 1 or 2  
cursor buttons.  
If you select “Custom”, you can adjust three  
parameters as listed below.  
Return  
Panorama:  
Select the Panorama mode “On” or “Off” with the  
1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Panorama wraps the sound of the front left and right  
speakers around you, for an exciting perspective.  
Set the Center Gain level between 0.0 and 1.0  
in 0.1 level increments with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
4.  
Dimension:  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Set the Dimension level between –3 and +3 level in  
1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
Adjust the sound field either towards the front or  
towards the rear.  
This can be useful to help achieve a more  
suitable balance from all the speakers with certain  
recordings.  
Trubass:  
Set the Trubass level between 0 and 6 in 1- level  
increments with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
Trubass produced by the speakers are an octave  
below the actual physical capabilities of the speakers  
adding exciting, deeper bass effects.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button.  
SRS Dialog:  
Notes:  
Set the SRS Dialog level between 0 and 6 in 1-  
increments with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
This can be popped out of the surround audio  
effects, allowing the listener to easily discern what  
the actors say.  
• This parameter can only be set in the NEO:6-Music  
mode.  
• If “None” was selected for the center speaker setting  
in the Speaker Size menu, this setting is disabled.  
If “None” was selected for the center speaker  
setting in the Speaker Size menu, this setting  
cannot be selected.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
•
Analog&HDMI:  
HDMI Output Resolution  
4 VIDEO SETUP  
This mode both up-converts and down-converts  
analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video,  
Component Video). Furthermore, it up-converts  
from analog video signal to HDMI. (It cannot down-  
convert from HDMI digital video signals to analog  
video signals.)  
Selects the resolution of the video signal output  
from the HDMI terminal of this unit.  
Select from the following using the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
Auto ↔ Through ↔ 480/576p ↔ 720p ↔ 1080i  
↔ 1080p ↔ Auto  
Video settings are made as follows.  
Select “Video Setup” from the Main Menu  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
1.  
ENTER button.  
Analog Only:  
Video Setup  
This mode both up-converts and down-converts  
analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video,  
Component Video). It does not up-convert to  
HDMI.  
Video Convert  
TV-Auto  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: Disable  
: Output1  
: Auto  
OSD Information  
Component I / P Convert  
HDMI Output  
HDMI Output Resolution  
Off:  
This mode turns off all conversion features.  
Return  
Note:  
• For details on video convert feature, see page 46.  
TV-Auto  
•
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
Select the TV-Auto On/Off function to enable or  
disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. (refer to  
page 45)  
Select the desired menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
•
OSD Information  
Select the OSD information function to “Enable” or  
“Disable” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
If you select “Enable”, this unit will display the  
status of the feature (Volume up/down, input  
select, etc..) on the monitor. If you do not desire  
this information, select “Disable”.  
•
Video Convert  
This unit is equipped to convert video signals for  
monitor output.  
This section explains how to set up conversion for  
each type of video input.  
Note:  
• OSD information is not output to Monitor Output  
Select “Video Setup” from the Main Menu  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
ENTER button.  
1.  
of HDMI and Component Video. However, OSD  
information is output if the Video Convert function  
is used to output Video or S-Video video signals to  
Monitor Out of HDMI and Component Video.  
Select “Video Convert” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
For details, refer to“Video Convert”on page 46.  
Video Convert  
•
Component I/P Convert  
: Analog & HDMI  
: Analog & HDMI  
: Analog & HDMI  
: Analog & HDMI  
: Analog & HDMI  
: Analog & HDMI  
: Analog & HDMI  
: Analog & HDMI  
TV  
DVD  
VCR  
Set whether or not to convert 480i signals to 480p  
signals when outputting the analog video input  
signal input from the VIDEO terminals, S-VIDEO  
terminals, or COMPONENT terminals.  
DSS  
AUX1  
TAPE  
CD/R  
AUX2  
Select “Enable” or “Disable.”  
Disable: Do not convert  
Enable: Convert  
Return  
Note:  
This setting is enabled only when Video Convert is set  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
to other than Off.  
Select “Function” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons  
and set the video conversion mode with the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons  
3.  
•
HDMI Output  
This setting is for selecting which output terminal,  
HDMI 1 or HDMI 2, to output the signal to. Select  
the output destination with the 1 / 2 cursor  
buttons.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Preference  
HDMI Audio:  
5 PREFERENCE  
Zone A Setup  
Zone B Setup  
DC Trigger Setup  
Optical  
This setting determines whether to play back  
audio input to the HDMI jacks through the unit or  
output it through the unit to a TV or projector.  
Enable: The audio input to the HDMI jacks can  
be played back by this unit.  
•
•
Zone A Setup :  
Zone B Setup :  
: Rec  
: Economy  
: Main  
Standby Mode  
Audio  
“5-1 ZONE SETUP” (see page 39)  
: Enable  
: Disable  
HDMI Audio  
HDMI Lip Sync  
•
DC Trigger Setup :  
In such case, audio signals are not  
output to the TV or projector.  
“5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP” (see page 39)  
Return  
Through: The audio input to the HDMI jacks is not  
output from the speaker terminals of the  
unit. Audio data is output directly to the  
TV or projector. This setting is used to  
listen to audio on a multi channel TV,  
etc.  
Select “Preference” from Main Menu with the  
1.  
3
or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
button.  
Preference  
Zone A Setup  
Zone B Setup  
DC Trigger Setup  
Optical Output  
Standby Mode  
Audio  
HDMI Lipsync:  
Video signals may take longer to process than  
audio signals depending on the connected video  
equipment.  
When the unit is connected to TV or Projector  
supporting Auto Lipsync Correction in HDMI  
1.3a, audio and video can be automatically  
synchronized using this function.  
: Rec  
DC Trigger Setup  
Zone A Setup  
Audio Source  
Sleep Timer  
Stereo / Mono.  
Zone Pre Out  
Volume Mode  
Level  
: Economy  
: Main  
: DVD  
TriggerSystem Error!!  
: Disable  
: Off  
TV  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
: Enable  
: Disable  
HDMI Audio  
HDMI Lip Sync  
: Stereo  
: Off  
DVD  
VCR  
: Variable  
: -90dB  
DSS  
Return  
AUX1  
Use the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to switch between  
Enable and Disable.  
Enable: Auto Lipsync Correction is used to  
synchronize audio and video.  
:
TAPE  
Zone Speaker Out  
Volume Mode  
Level  
* * *  
:
CD/R  
* * *  
: Up / Down  
:
Enter : Select  
Exit : Exit  
:
7.1ch Input / AUX2  
Tuner  
* * *  
USB Audio  
Return  
Return  
Disable: Deactivates this function.  
Select the desired menu with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons and press the ENTER button.  
2.  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Note:  
Optical:  
• This function is not available when the unit is  
connected to equipment that does not support HDMI  
1.3a or Auto Lipsync Correction. For details, check  
the user’s manual of the connected equipment.  
Select when using equipment with optical digital  
output.  
Rec:  
Select when recording to a CD  
recorder or MD recorder.  
(See page 12)  
Zone B Setup  
Audio Source  
Sleep Timer  
• If this function is unavailable, you can use the  
regular Lipsync function to synchronize audio and  
video. (See page 45)  
: DVD (Dig.2)  
: Off  
Zone B:  
Select when using ZONE B.  
(See pages 21, 39, 64)  
: Off  
Zone Digital Out  
Return  
Standby:  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move the  
cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button.  
When this is set to “Economy”, you can reduce the  
power consumption when the unit is in the Standby  
mode. When “Economy” is selected, “TV Auto”  
and “RS-232C” are disabled when the unit is in the  
Standby mode.  
Audio:  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
In the Audio mode, Dolby Digital and DTS output  
is set to either “Main” or “Sub”. Select “Audio” with  
the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, then select Main ↔ Sub  
↔ Main+Sub with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
5-1 ZONE SETUP  
5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP  
Select the desired item with the 3 or 4 cursor  
button.  
4.  
The SR6003 has source selectors, sleep timers,  
zonespeaker output, and remote controller for the  
two other ZONEs in the ZONE system.  
This unit has a DC trigger control jack, which can be  
used to link with input functions for the main ZONE  
or ZONE A or ZONE B.  
Audio Source:  
Select the audio source of the ZONE output with  
the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
These features can be set from this menu.  
Select “Preference” from Main Menu with the  
Sleep Timer:  
1.  
The sleep mode is available when the ZONE is  
active, set the time with 1 or 2 cursor buttons.The  
sleep timer can be set to a maximum 120 minutes  
in 10 minute increments.  
Select “Preference” from the Main Menu  
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
3
or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER  
1.  
button.  
ENTER button.  
Select “DC Trigger Setup” with the 3 or 4  
cursor buttons.  
2.  
3.  
Stereo / Mono: (Zone A only)  
Select “Zone A Setup” or “Zone B Setup” with  
the 3 or 4 cursor buttons.  
2.  
This mode switches audio output to the ZONE  
system between Monaural and Stereo, using the  
1 and 2 cursor buttons.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.  
3.  
Zone Pre Out: (Zone A only)  
Switch the zone pre out “On” or “Off” with the 1 or  
2 cursor buttons.  
DC Trigger Setup  
The following explanation shows how to operate  
ZONE A of the ZONE system.  
TriggerSystem Error!!  
: Disable  
TV  
:
* * *  
Volume Mode: (Zone A only)  
Select whether the zone pre out level is Variable or  
Fixed with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
DVD  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
Zone A Setup  
VCR  
: DVD  
Audio Source  
Sleep Timer  
Stereo / Mono.  
Zone Pre Out  
Volume Mode  
Level  
DSS  
: Off  
AUX1  
: Stereo  
: Off  
TAPE  
Level (Volume Level): (Zone A only)  
Adjust the zone pre out level with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons. The volume can be set between  
-90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.  
CD/R  
: Variable  
: -90dB  
7.1ch Input / AUX2  
Tuner  
:
Zone Speaker Out  
Volume Mode  
Level  
* * *  
USB Audio  
Return  
:
* * *  
Zone Speaker Out: (Zone A only)  
Switch the zone speaker out “On” or “Off” with the  
1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
:
* * *  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Return  
Volume Mode: (Zone A only)  
Select whether the zone speaker out level is  
Variable or Fixed with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.  
You can select “Main Zone”, “Zone A”, “Zone  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
4.  
B”, “Remote” or “Disable” with the 1 or  
2
cursor buttons.  
The following explanation shows how to operate  
ZONE B of the ZONE system.  
Level (Volume Level): (Zone A only)  
Note:  
Adjust the zone speaker out level with the 1 or 2  
cursor buttons. The volume can be set between  
-90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.  
• Remote is available for the external control. The  
RC003SR cannot operate the function.  
Zone B Setup  
: DVD(Dig.2)  
: Off  
Audio Source  
Sleep Timer  
Zone Digital Out: (Zone B only)  
Switch the zone digital out “On” or “Off” with the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons.  
: Off  
Zone Digital Out  
Select desired input source with the 3 or  
cursor buttons.  
4
5.  
6.  
7.  
Return  
Note:  
Set to “On” or “Off” with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
• Zone Speaker Out setting can be changed when the  
Surround Back is set to “None” in the Speaker Size  
menu and “SPEAKER C” is in the OFF position  
on the rear panel. When this setting is unavailable,  
“***” is displayed.  
After you complete this portion of the setup,  
move the cursor to “Return” with the 3 or  
cursor button and press the ENTER button.  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
4
• If “Volume” is set to “Fixed”, the ZONE output  
level cannot be adjusted from the ZONE A.  
• Zone Speaker Out cannot be on the ZONE B.  
Note:  
• Functions other than ones that are set to either  
DIGITAL IN 1-5 or F cannot be selected in ZONE  
B. There are no MONO/ST, VOL, LEV or SPKR  
settings for ZONE B.  
• When an input source that is on in the set ZONE  
is selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIGGER  
output terminal.  
• If Optical Output is set to Rec (See page 38), Zone B  
functions cannot be used.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Acoustic EQ.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move the  
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons  
and press the ENTER button.  
To use the remote controller (RC003SR) to change  
the EQ Mode, press the AMP button and press the  
EQ button.  
6 ACOUSTIC EQ  
: Off  
EQ. Mode  
Preset Graphic EQ. Adjust  
Check Auto EQ.  
This display is for setting up the equalizer and  
changing the Equalizer mode.  
Return  
•
•
Preset Graphic EQ Adjust :  
“6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ” (see page 41)  
Check Auto EQ :  
“6-2 CHECK AUTO” (see page 41)  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
EQ Mode:  
There are 4 equalizer modes to choose from: Preset  
Graphic EQ that allows the user to manually adjust  
the equalizer, and Audyssey, Audyssey Front and  
Audyssey Flat that automatically adjust the equalizer  
from the measurement results of the Auto Setup  
feature (see page 30).  
Preset Adjust  
Reset  
Check Auto  
EQ. Mode  
Channel  
63Hz  
: Channel  
: Audyssey  
: Front Left  
: -15.0dB  
: Front Left  
Channel  
63Hz  
[dB]  
[dB]  
+9dB  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
+9dB  
Each time this button is pressed, the EQ Mode  
changes as follows.  
Audyssey Front:  
This mode matches the characteristics of each  
speaker to those of the front speakers.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
-2.0dB  
-5.0dB  
+9.0dB  
+3.0dB  
-5.0dB  
-7.0dB  
125Hz  
250Hz  
500Hz  
1kHz  
125Hz  
250Hz  
500Hz  
1kHz  
0dB  
-9dB  
0dB  
-9dB  
-18dB  
-18dB  
Audyssey Flat  
Audyssey  
Off  
Audyssey Front  
Preset  
63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k  
[Hz]  
63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k  
[Hz]  
2kHz  
2kHz  
Audyssey Flat:  
4kHz  
4kHz  
This mode flattens the frequency characteristics of  
all speakers.It is suited for playback of multichannel  
music such as Dolby Digital and DTS.  
: -18.0dB  
: -20.0dB  
8kHz  
8kHz  
16kHz  
Return  
16kHz  
Return  
Notes:  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Audyssey:  
•
“Audyssey Front”, “Audyssey Flat” and “Audyssey”  
can be selected after executing the Auto Setup feature.  
This mode adjusts the frequency characteristics  
of all speakers so as to create the best listening  
environment for the sound characteristics of the  
listening room.  
• If a speaker that was determined “No” in Auto Setup  
is manually turned on, the “Audyssey”, “Audyssey  
Front” and “Audyssey Flat” modes cannot be  
selected.  
Preset:  
This mode adjusts the graphic equalizer that was  
set in Preset Graphic EQ Adjust to adjust the  
characteristics of each speaker (see page 41).  
• The equalizer turns off when the Pure Direct mode,  
Source Direct mode, Dolby Headphone or Virtual  
mode is set.  
• Acoustic EQ Modes are not used during playback  
of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-HD  
signals.  
Off:  
The graphic equalizer is not used.  
Even in this case, settings made using Speaker Auto  
Setup (speaker yes/no, distance, size, channel level,  
crossover) are enabled.  
Select “Acoustic EQ” from Main Menu with the  
1.  
3
or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER  
button.  
• Tone Control is disabled when an EQ Mode is in  
use.  
Select “EQ. Mode” with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons.  
2.  
3.  
Select “Audyssey Front”, “Audyssey Flat”,  
“Audyssey”, “Preset” or “Off” with the 1 or  
2
cursor buttons.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ  
6-2 CHECK AUTO  
These modes allow you to set a 9-band graphic  
equalizer for each of the 7 channels.  
These menus are for confirming the results of Auto  
Setup function equalizer measurement (Audyssey  
Front, Audyssey Flat, Audyssey).  
Select “Acoustic EQ” from Main Menu with the  
1.  
Select “Acoustic EQ” from Main Menu with the  
3
or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER  
1.  
3
or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER  
button.  
button.  
Select “Preset Graphic EQ Adjust” with the 3  
or 4 cursor buttons.  
2.  
3.  
Select “Check Auto EQ” with the  
buttons.  
3
or  
4
cursor  
2.  
3.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Press the ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Preset Adjust  
: Channel  
Reset  
Channel  
63Hz  
Check Auto  
: Front Left  
: Audyssey  
: Center  
EQ. Mode  
Channel  
63Hz  
[dB]  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
+9dB  
[dB]  
+9dB  
125Hz  
250Hz  
500Hz  
1kHz  
0dB  
-9dB  
: -15.0dB  
:
:
:
:
:
:
-2.0dB  
-5.0dB  
+9.0dB  
+3.0dB  
-5.0dB  
-7.0dB  
125Hz  
250Hz  
500Hz  
1kHz  
0dB  
-9dB  
-18dB  
63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k  
[Hz]  
-18dB  
2kHz  
63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k  
[Hz]  
4kHz  
2kHz  
8kHz  
4kHz  
16kHz  
Return  
: -18.0dB  
: -20.0dB  
8kHz  
16kHz  
Return  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
: Up / Down  
: Change  
Enter :  
Exit : Exit  
Reset:  
EQ. Mode:  
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the  
channel(s) to be reset to either the currently  
displayed channel (“Channel”) or all channels  
(“All-Channel”), and press the ENTER button to  
enter the setting.  
Select EQ (mode) with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons  
followed by the desired equalizer (“Audyssey”,  
“Audyssey Front”, “Audyssey Flat”).  
Channel:  
Select the channel to check with the 1 or 2 cursor  
buttons.  
“All-Channel” : Resets all channels.  
“Channel”  
: Resets only the currently  
displayed channel.  
Notes:  
Channel:  
Select the channel (“Front Left”, “Center”, “Front  
Right”, “Surround Right”, “Surround Back  
Right”, “Surround Back Left” or “Surround Left”)  
to adjust with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, and switch  
to the adjustment mode with the 4 cursor button.  
• The frequency will not be exactly the same as in the  
Preset Graphic EQ modes.  
• Front Left and Front Right are not indicated on the  
Audyssey Front mode.  
Frequency:  
Once finished checking, select “Return” with  
4.  
Select the target frequency on the graph with the  
3 or 4 cursor buttons. Adjust the level with the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons. (Note that this can be adjusted  
to any level between –20 and +9 dB in 0.5 dB  
increments.)  
the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the  
ENTER button to return to the “Acoustic EQ”  
menu.  
Move to the next frequency with the 3 or 4 cursor  
buttons, and adjust the level.  
After you complete this portion of the setup move  
cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and  
press the ENTER button.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE  
SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR DIGITAL  
AUDIO INPUT  
ADVANCED OPERATION  
AMP OPERATION  
In normal operation, the audio or video source  
selected for listening through this unit is sent to the  
record outputs.  
This means that any program you are watching  
or listening to may be recorded simply by placing  
machines connected to the outputs for TAPE OUT,  
CD/CDR OUT and VCR OUT in the record mode.  
USING THE SLEEP TIMER  
DISPLAY MODE  
To record the input source signal you are currently  
watching or listening to  
If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you  
can temporarily select the audio input mode for each  
input source as following procedures.  
1.  
Press the AMP button and press the A/D button.  
When this button is pressed, the input mode is  
switched in the following sequence.  
To program this unit for automatic standby, press the  
SLEEP button on the remote controller.  
Each press of the button will increase the time before  
shut down in the following sequence.  
You can select the display mode for the front display  
of the unit.  
To select this mode, press the DISPLAY on the  
remote controller or the front panel.  
When this button is pressed, the display mode is  
switched in the following sequence.  
Normal → Volume → Auto display OFF → Display  
OFF → Normal Mode  
Auto → HDMI → Digital → Analog → Auto  
1.  
Auto mode:  
The types of signals being input to the digital and  
analog input jacks for the selected input source are  
detected automatically.  
If no digital signal is being input, the analog input  
jacks are selected automatically.  
HDMI mode:  
HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI  
input has been assigned as an input source.  
When “HDMI Audio” under Preference of the  
Setup Menu is set to “Through”, the HDMI mode  
cannot be selected.  
Digital mode:  
The input signal is fixed to an assigned digital input  
terminal.  
Analog mode:  
The analog input jacks are selected.  
OFF  
120  
10  
110  
20  
30  
40  
70  
50  
60  
Select the input source to record by turning the  
1.  
100  
90  
80  
INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front panel or  
simply press the input selector buttons on the  
remote controller.  
The sleep time will be shown for a few seconds in the  
display on the front panel, and it will count down until  
the time has elapsed.  
When the programmed sleep time has elapsed, the  
unit will automatically turn off.  
Note that the SLEEP indicator on the display will  
illuminate when the Sleep function is programmed.  
To cancel the Sleep function, press the SLEEP  
button until the display shows “SLEEP OFF” and the  
SLEEP indicator will disappear.  
Normal mode:  
The following three mode types are displayed.  
• Displays the selected input function. If the  
function has been renamed using the Function  
Rename feature (see page 28), the renamed  
name appears on the display.  
• Displays the input mode set via the Function  
Input Setup feature. (See page 27)  
• Displays the status of the selected surround  
mode.  
The input source is now selected and you may  
watch or listen to it as desired.  
The currently selected input source signal is  
output to the TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT and  
2.  
VCR OUT outputs for recording.  
Start recording to the recording component as  
3.  
desired.  
Notes:  
Volume mode:  
This selection is temporary and will not be stored in  
memory.  
To store changes to the input mode, select “Input  
Setup” from the Main Menu. (See page 27)  
The input function and input mode are displayed  
in the upper part, and the current volume level is  
displayed in the lower part.  
• When connecting only digital signal input, output  
cannot be made to the TAPEOUT, CD/CDR OUT  
or VCR OUT terminals. When using recording  
functions, be sure to also make connections for  
analog signal input.  
Auto Display Off mode:  
The display is off. But, if you make a change to  
the unit such as the input or surround mode, the  
display will show that change, then go back to off  
after about 3 seconds.When changing the volume,  
it is not displayed.  
• No conversion is made from Video signal input to  
S-Video signal output or from S-Video signal input  
to Video signal output. Always use the same signal  
type for both input and output.  
• Video or audio signals input to HDMI input terminals  
cannot be recorded.  
Display Off mode:  
The display is off completely.  
Note:  
• Only the “DISP” indicator will be illuminated on the  
front display in display off condition.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE  
Example: AUTO SURROUND  
NIGHT MODE  
LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES  
DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE  
Useful at night or when loud noise is undesirable,  
this mode compresses the dynamic range, making  
it easier to hear quieter audio content without  
increasing the overall volume.  
Note that the effect of night mode is determined  
by the Dolby Digital content. Night mode may have  
no effect with content that does not support this  
function.  
This jack may be used to listen to the unit’s output  
through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the  
headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono  
plug.  
Note that the speakers will automatically be turned  
off when the headphone jack is in use.  
This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual  
sounds heard from the speakers.  
When headphones are used, the MENU button  
automatically switches to the Dolby headphone  
mode.  
The OSD that appears when the MENU button is  
pressed is shown below.  
HEAD PHONE  
DOLBY HP MODE :DH  
SURROUND  
:PLII MV  
L LEVEL  
R LEVEL  
:+10.0dB  
:
0.0dB  
(Using the unit)  
To select the Auto surround mode during playback,  
press the AUTO button on the front panel.  
Note:  
To select this mode, press the AMP button on  
the remote controller.  
1.  
DOLBY HP (Headphone) MODE can be selected  
with the left and right cursor buttons.  
BYPASS → DH (DOLBY Headphone) → BYPASS  
• When using headphones, the surround mode will  
change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by  
MENU and Cursor button.  
(Using the remote controller)  
Each time the NIGHT button is pressed, the  
mode changes according to the following  
options indicated on the front of the unit.  
2.  
To select the Auto surround mode, press the AMP  
button and press the AUTO button.  
• For surround modes, see “Surround Mode” on  
page 78.  
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting  
as soon as the headphone plug is removed from the  
jack.  
BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode  
and delivers ordinary 2-channel stereo.  
DH: Dolby Headphone is a signal processing  
system that delivers a sound similar to  
room speakers.  
• AUTO Mode  
N I G H T A U T O  
DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE  
It makes it possible to experience the  
volume and space of a 5-channel  
surround system using ordinary stereo  
headphones.  
AUTO mode is available when decording Dolby  
TrueHD signals.  
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of  
Dolby Digital.  
Whenplayingbacksoftwarewhichhasbeenencoded  
in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a brief  
message on the FL display which will read "D-NORM  
X dB" (X being a numeric value).  
When night mode is activated, “NIGHT” is  
illuminated on the front of the unit. (See page 6)  
When the PURE DIRECT mode is selected, Dolby  
surround processing is bypassed and “✽✽✽” is  
displayed as the mode indication.  
↓
•
NIGHT Mode ON  
Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the  
source material has been recorded at a higher or  
lower level than usual. For example, if you see the  
following message: "D-NORM + 4 dB" on the FL  
display, to keep the overall output level constant just  
turn down the volume control by 4 dB. In other words,  
the source material that you are listening to has been  
recorded 4 dB louder than usual.  
The surround mode can be selected when the  
modes in DH is selected.  
N I G H T O N  
L/R LEVEL can be set in the ±12 dB range.  
Setting the Night mode to “ON” compresses the  
dynamic range in Dolby Digital only.  
Notes:  
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as  
soon as the plug is removed from the jack.  
↓
• NIGHT Mode OFF  
• In headphone mode, Tone Control and ACOUSTIC  
EQ are not available.  
N I G H T O F F  
Turn off the Night mode.  
If you do not see a message on the FL display, then  
no adjustment of the volume control is necessary.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Notes:  
• When the 7.1 CH. Input is in use, you may not select  
M-DAX (Marantz Dynamic Audio eXpander)  
ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL  
7.1 CH INPUT  
This unit is equipped for future expansion through the  
use of Multi channel Super Audio CD multichannel  
player or DVD-Audio player.  
a surround mode, as the external decoder determines  
processing.  
• In addition, there is no signal at the record outputs  
when the 7.1 CH. Input is in use.  
When this is selected, the input signals connected to  
theL(frontleft), R(frontright), CENTER, SL(surround  
left), SR (surround right) and SBL (surround back left)  
and SBR (surround back right) channels of the 7.1  
CH. In jacks are output directly to the front (left and  
right), center, surround (left and right) and surround  
back speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks  
without passing through the surround circuitry.  
In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer)  
jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack.  
When 7.1 CH. INPUT is selected, the last video input  
used remains routed to the Monitor Outputs.  
This permits simultaneous viewing with video  
sources  
• Furthermore, the following functions are not  
available during 7.1 CH Input use.  
Test Tone, NIGHT MODE, Source Direct, Pure  
Direct, HT-EQ, Tone Control, Acoustic EQ.  
If the selected analog audio input signal is greater  
than the capable level of internal processing, the  
“PEAK” indicator will light up on the front display. If  
this happens, you should press the ATT button on  
the remote controller.  
“ATT” indicator will be illuminated when this function  
is activated. The signal-input level is reduced by  
about half. Attenuation will not work with the output  
signal of TAPE-OUT, CD/CD-R and VCR-OUT.  
This function is memorized for each individual input  
source.  
AUX2 INPUT  
If you don’t need to connect 7.1 Ch. input terminals  
with multi channel decoder,  
L(front left) and R (front right) inputs terminals are  
available as AUX2 input.  
In this case,You can connect additional audio source  
to AUX2 as other audio input terminals.  
This function makes up for lost audio content in MP3  
or AAC sources (from lossy compression) during  
playback. Choose one of the following levels for this  
effect as desired.  
“HIGH”: Stronger effect  
“LOW”: Weaker effect  
2.  
1.  
4.  
“OFF”: Deactivated.  
(Using the remote controller)  
When switching to M-DAX mode, press the AMP  
button.  
Press the M-DAX button.  
Each time this button is pressed, M-DAX changes  
as follows.  
SPEAKER A/B  
4.  
3.  
OFF  
LOW  
HIGH  
VIDEO ON/OFF  
The “M-DAX” indicator on the front display lights  
when M-DAX mode is LOW or HIGH. (See page 6)  
Select a desired Video source to decide the  
routed video signal to the Monitor Outputs.  
1.  
When no video signal is connected to the unit or  
a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV, the  
unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by  
selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting.  
To select video off, press the AMP button and press  
the V.OFF button.  
Notes:  
Press the 7.1 button on the remote controller to  
switch the 7.1 channel input.  
2.  
This unit has speaker system-A and speaker system-  
B for front L/R channels.  
You can select these systems by pressing SPKR A/B  
on the remote controller.  
• M-DAX is compatible with PCM (48 kHz or lower)  
and two-channel analog sources.  
If it is necessary to adjust the output level of  
each channel, press the CH.SEL button on the  
remote controller.  
3.  
• The M-DAX is not available when Dolby Virtual  
Speaker mode is being used.  
Adjust the speaker output levels so that you can  
hear the same sound level from each speaker  
at the listening position. For the front left, front  
right, center, surround left, surround right and  
surround back speakers, the output levels can  
be adjusted between –12 to +12 dB.  
Press the SPKR A/B button.  
Each time this button is pressed, Speaker system A  
and B changes as follows.  
A
B
A+B  
OFF  
The subwoofer can be adjusted between –18  
and +12 dB.  
These adjustments result will be stored to 7.1  
CH. INPUT memory.  
Adjust the main volume with the MAIN  
VOLUME knob or the VOL buttons on the  
4.  
remote controller.  
The “V-OFF” indicator on the front display panel will  
light.  
To cancel the 7.1 CH. INPUT setting, press the 7.1  
button on the remote controller.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION  
LIP.SYNC  
DUAL BACKUP MEMORY  
RECOVERY OF MEMORY  
This function allows the component connected to the  
TV-VIDEO in jack to control the power (ON/OFF) to  
the unit.  
Depending on the image device (TV, monitor,  
projector, etc.) connected to the unit a time lag can  
occur between image signal processing and audio  
signal processing. Though minor, this time lag can  
interfere with movie and music enjoyment. The LIP.  
SYNC feature delays the audio signal with respect  
to the image signal output from the unit to correct  
the time lag between the sound and image. It can be  
operated with the “LIP SYNC” and 1 and 2 cursor  
buttons of the remote controller. Set the remote  
controller to the AMP mode before operating the  
LIP.SYNC feature. The initial setting is OFF (0 ms).  
The time lag can be adjusted in 10 ms steps up to  
200 ms.  
The unit stores settings information in nonvolatile  
memory even when the main power supply is turned  
off. Using the Dual Backup Memory function, you  
can write settings information to another memory  
area to back up saved settings for recovery anytime  
as needed.  
Recover backed up settings as follows.  
Hold the MEMORY and MENU buttons on the front  
panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.  
AUTO POWER ON  
Be sure the TV auto mode is Enabled. (Refer to  
page 37:)  
1.  
BACKUP  
Set up the unit in the state for which you want to  
store the settings. Hold the MEMORY and ENTER  
buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least  
3 seconds.  
Connect your TV TUNER (etc) to the TV-  
VIDEO in terminal. Be sure to connect the  
VIDEO input.  
2.  
Turn OFF the power to the TV TUNER and turn  
standby to the unit.  
3.  
Watch the picture on the image device (i.e., TV,  
monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.  
“MEMORY LOAD” is displayed and the unit’s stored  
settings are reapplied.  
The unit temporarily enters standby mode. If there is  
no backup data, “NO BACKUP” is displayed and no  
data is recovered.  
Turn ON theTVTUNER and tune in a receivable  
station.  
4.  
When the station is received, this unit turns ON  
and TV is selected automatically.  
5.  
M E M O R Y L O A D  
N O B A C K U P  
AUTO POWER OFF  
“MEMORY SAVING” is displayed and the unit’s  
settings are saved. The stored settings information  
is retained until Dual Backup Memory is used again  
and the information is overwritten.  
In the above situation, turn the TV TUNER OFF  
1.  
or select a channel that does not contain any  
broadcast.  
Note:  
• Because the following settings values are  
not backed up, each Volume value is set to  
Minimum.  
• Main ZONE Volume  
• ZONE A Volume  
The power to the unit switches to STANDBY  
after approx. 5 minutes.  
2.  
M E M O R Y S A V I N G  
Notes:  
Note:  
• AUTO POWER OFF is canceled if this unit is set to  
a source other than TV.  
Note:  
• The LIP.SYNC feature turns OFF (0 ms) in the  
SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode. When the  
SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode is deactivated, the  
set value of the LIP.SYNC feature is automatically  
restored.  
• ZONE Speaker A Volume  
• The following settings values cannot be backed  
up.  
• Main ZONE Volume  
• ZONE A Volume  
• ZONE Speaker A Volume  
The function reactivates when TV is selected again.  
• Some TV broadcasts may cause the TV AUTO  
FUNCTION to turn ON.  
• Even if you do not correct the time lag manually this  
way, audio and video are automatically synchronized  
when the unit is connected to TV or Projector  
supporting Auto Lipsync Correction in HDMI 1.3a.  
For instructions on Auto Lipsync Correction, see  
page 38.  
• The S-Video, component and HDMI terminal does  
not support “TV AUTO ON/OFF” function.  
• This function is inactive when STANDBY MODE  
is set to ECONOMY. To use this function, set  
STANDBY MODE to NORMAL.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Notes:  
• The HDMI video signal input from the playback  
VIDEO CONVERT  
CONNECTION EXAMPLE  
HDMI RESOLUTION  
• When a monitor is connected to the HDMI  
MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit  
This function is used to output the analog video  
signal to HDMI as follows.  
• 480i signals can be converted to 480p, 1080i,  
720p or 1080p signals, while 480p signals can be  
converted to 1080i, 720p or 1080p signals.  
ANALOG VIDEO CONVERSION  
device is not output from the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.  
This unit is equipped to convert video signals  
for monitor output. Because of this, indifferent of  
the connection (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT  
VIDEO) between the playback device and this unit,  
listening and viewing are possible with a single  
higher grade cable between the MONITOR OUT  
terminal of the unit and the monitor.  
Notes of OSD menu system:  
• The setup menu can be displayed through all  
video out terminals (“HDMI”, “COMPONENT”,  
“SVIDEO” and “VIDEO”).  
• 720p signals can be converted to 1080i or 1080p.  
• 1080i signals can be converted to 1080p.  
VIDEO  
or S-VIDEO  
or component  
or HDMI  
• The output resolution can be set for HDMI OUT 1  
and HDMI OUT 2.  
• OSD information is output only to the VIDEO and  
S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals.  
HDMI  
OSD information is also output when the video  
conversion feature is on and the video signal input  
to the VIDEO or S-VIDEO input jack of the unit  
is converted and output from the COMPONENT  
VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals.  
UP-CONVERSION FROM ANALOG VIDEO  
SIGNALS TO HDMI  
Notes:  
Notes:  
• If the resolution of the component video signal  
input from the playback device is other than 480i,  
480p, 1080i or 720p, images are not output from the  
HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.  
• Do not set to 1080i, 720p or 1080p when connected  
to a monitor that does not support 1080i, 720p or  
1080p signals. The SETUP MENU will not be  
displayed. If the SETUP MENU is not displayed,  
change settings while viewing the main unit display  
panel.  
The up-conversion feature of this unit can output  
the input analog video signals (for component video  
signals of 480i, 480p, 1080i and 720p resolution, and  
S-Video and Video (composite) of 480i resolution) to  
the HDMI MONITOR terminal.  
I/P CONVERT  
• If the resolution of the S-Video or Video signal input  
from the playback device is other than 480i, images  
are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT  
terminal of the unit.  
The video circuit of the unit is equipped with an I/P  
conversion feature.  
• The resolution of analog component output cannot  
be changed.  
Notes:  
• HDMI video input is only output to the HDMI  
MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit. If connecting  
a playback device such as a DVD player to the  
HDMI input jack, connect the HDMI MONITOR  
OUT terminal of the unit to a TV monitor.  
When this feature is on, 480i analog video signals  
(VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO) input  
from a playback device can be converted to 480p and  
progressively output to the COMPONENT VIDEO or  
HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit.  
(For setting instructions, see page 37)  
• HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 cannot be output  
simultaneously.  
• When a monitor is connected to the VIDEO or S-  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit  
• This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal.  
• This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast  
forward and reverse play on video component.  
Note:  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
When a monitor is connected to the HDMI MONITOR  
OUT terminal, and HDMI RESOLUTION is set to  
720p, 1080i, 1080p, or AUTO, the I/P CONVERT for  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT does not function.  
•
If, while attempting to use the video convert feature,  
the unit cannot synchronize with the display device,  
“NO SIGNAL” appears on the monitor or noise is  
generated, this feature cannot be used. All of these  
signs are caused by equipment incompatibility; there  
is nothing wrong with the unit.  
or S-VIDEO  
or S-VIDEO  
or component  
HDMI  
HDMI OUT  
If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the  
“VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. Next,  
connectthevideoinputsignaltothedisplaycomponent  
via the MONITOR OUT terminal under VIDEO and  
the S-video input signal to the display component via  
the MONITOR OUT terminal under S-VIDEO.  
Notes:  
• The HDMI video signal input from the playback  
device is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit.  
• If the resolution of the component video signal input  
from the playback device is other than 480i, it is not  
output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT terminals of the unit.  
• The video convert feature constantly monitors  
input video signals and determines whether to  
convert the input signals or not. However, some  
input video signals cannot be detected correctly.  
If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the  
“VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”.  
• When a monitor is connected to the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit  
HDMI OUTPUT 1 or 2 can be selected and used  
with this unit.  
Each time the HDMI button on the remote controller  
is pressed, OUTPUT 1 is switched to OUTPUT 2 or  
vice versa.  
HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 cannot be output  
simultaneously.  
VIDEO  
or S-VIDEO  
component  
or component  
H D M I - O = O U T 1  
HDMI  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
What appears on the FL display  
iGuidance display:  
The folders and music files contained on the  
USB media are displayed as a list.  
USB OPERATION  
4.  
Displays descriptions of the function buttons.  
→
→
U S B :  
N O D E V I C E  
q
w
Any USB media that complies with the USB Mass  
Storage Class standard can be used with this unit.  
The USB media file systems support FAT16 and  
FAT32.  
MP3, WMA, AAC and WAV music files can be played  
back by the unit. (See page 50)  
What appears on the FL display  
Icon displays  
qFunction display:  
→
→
U S B : F o l d e r 1  
A l b u m n a m e  
q
w
Displays the names of the functions.  
wStatus display:  
: Folders (main folders, subfolders)  
: Files being played  
Displays the statuses of the USB function. Error  
messages are also displayed. (See page 76)  
To operate the unit from the remote controller, press  
the DMP button on the remote controller so that the  
USB mode is engaged.  
qFunction display/main folder name:  
Displays the names of the functions and main  
folders.  
Notes:  
What appears on the monitor screen (top menu)  
• OnlyASCII characters can be displayed on the unit's  
monitor screen and FL display. All other characters  
are converted into asterisks (*) and displayed.  
wCursor information:  
PREPARATIONS FOR USB OPERATION  
USB Audio  
q
Displays the currently selected file and folder.  
Note:  
• If no operation is performed for 10 minutes or  
longer, the screen saver display appears on the  
monitor screen.  
Before proceeding with USB operation, check that the  
unit and monitor screen are connected properly.  
What appears on the monitor screen (File list)  
• The screen saver can be enabled or disabled by  
holding down ENTER (either on the unit or remote  
controller) for 3 seconds on the top menu screen.  
(Using the unit)  
USB Audio  
../Folder1  
q
w
[ 01/18 ]  
e
t
1.  
Album name1  
w
Album name2  
Title name1.mp3  
Title name2.wav  
Title name3.m4a  
Title name4.wma  
Title name5.mp3  
Title name6.wav  
Title name7.m4a  
Title name8.wma  
-30dB  
-30dB  
:
No device  
Enter :  
e
r
Exit :  
r
u
qFunction display:  
Displays the names of the functions.  
Stop  
Enter : Select  
wStatus display:  
y
i
Exit :  
: Browse  
Displays the statuses of the USB function.  
(See page 50)  
To select USB, turn the INPUT SELECTOR  
knob on the front panel.  
1.  
qFunction display:  
Displays the names of the functions.  
eVolume display:  
wName of main folder:  
Displays the volume level.  
rGuidance display:  
(Using the remote controller)  
Displays the name of the main folder currently  
listed and displayed.  
Displays descriptions of the function keys.  
eList number/total number:  
1.  
Displays the list number at the cursor position and  
the total number of files and subfolders.  
Connect the USB media containing the music  
files to the USB connector on the unit's front  
panel.  
3.  
rSubfolders, file list:  
Displays the subfolders and files in the order in  
which they were stored on the storage media.  
When files and folders are mixed, the folders are  
displayed first.  
Press the DMP button two times in a row.  
1.  
The top menu screen is displayed.  
2.  
tSelection cursor:  
Selects files and folders.  
yPlay status:  
Displays the play status of the file being played.  
uPage indicator:  
Appears when the list pages can be scrolled up or  
down.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
rTitle display:  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
PLAYING FILES ON THE USB MEDIA  
Displays the title of the file being played. The  
filename is displayed if there is no tag information.  
3 / 4  
(Remote controller, unit)  
Cursor movement  
tArtist name display:  
Moves to the selected folder when the cursor is positioned at a  
folder.  
2
(Remote controller, unit)  
2.  
2.  
Displays the name of the play file artist.  
“UNKNOWN” appears if there is no artist name.  
1
(Remote controller, unit)  
3.  
1.  
2.  
Moves to the higher folder.  
yAlbum name display:  
Displays the name of the play file album.  
“UNKNOWN” appears if there is no album name.  
Moves to the selected folder when the cursor is positioned at a  
folder.  
ENTER  
(Remote controller, unit)  
uElapsed time:  
Plays the selected file when the cursor is positioned at a file.  
Select the tracks to be played, and press the  
ENTER or 2 button.  
1.  
Displays the elapsed play time of the file.  
iContent time:  
EXIT (Unit)  
9 (STOP)  
(Remote controller)  
Pause  
The status display screen appears, and the  
tracks are played in file list order.  
Displays the total play time of the file.  
oRepeat/random statuses:  
TOP  
(Remote controller)  
Moves to the highest folder.  
Displays the repeat and random statuses. They  
are not displayed when the settings are OFF.  
(+) next page  
PAGE + / –  
(Remote controller)  
What appears on the FL display  
(-) previous page  
!Play status:  
→
→
U S B : A r t i s t n a m  
T i t l e n a m e  
q
w
2 (PLAY)  
(Remote controller)  
Playback  
Displays the play status of the currently selected  
file.  
; (PAUSE)  
(Remote controller)  
Pause/release  
!Volume display:  
qFunction display/name of artist:  
(§) Plays the next file.  
Displays the volume level.  
!Guidance display:  
Displays the names of the function and artist.  
“Unknown” appears if there is no artist name.  
∞ / § (SKIP)  
(Remote controller)  
(∞) Plays the previous file.  
(Cues when there is less than 1 second from the start of the file.)  
(6) Search +  
(5) Search –  
wPlayback status/title:  
Displays descriptions of the function buttons.  
5 / 6 (SEARCH)  
(Remote controller)  
Displays the playback status and title. If the title  
is unknown, the filename minus its extension is  
displayed.  
Icon displays  
The following icons are displayed on the screen.  
REPEAT  
(Remote controller)  
Repeat play setting  
Random play setting  
: Folder (main folder)  
: File  
RANDOM  
(Remote controller)  
What appears on the monitor screen (statuses)  
USB Audio  
../Folder1  
q
w
: Artist  
: Album  
08/18  
Track  
e
: Elapsed time  
: Content time  
Title name  
Title:  
r
t
y
THE UNIT  
Artist name  
Album name  
Artist:  
Album:  
Elapsed  
Dulation  
00:03:26  
00:09:19  
u
i
!
!
!
To play another file while a file is playing, press  
2.  
the 1 button, and display the file list. Use the  
3/4 buttons to move the icon to the desired  
track, and press the ENTER or 2 (PLAY)  
button.  
-30dB  
Now Playing  
Enter :  
o
Exit : Stop  
: Browse  
qFunction display:  
To stop playback, press the 9 button.  
3.  
Displays the names of the functions.  
wStatus display:  
Displays the statuses of the USB function. Error  
messages are also displayed.  
eCurrent file number/total number of files:  
Displays the number of the file currently playing  
and the total number of files contained in the main  
folder.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
LISTENING TO FILES REPEATEDLY (REPEAT PLAY)  
PLAYING TRACKS AT RANDOM (RANDOM PLAY)  
PLAYING SPECIFIC PARTS (SEARCH)  
The tracks on the USB media can be played in 1  
track (1 file) repeat mode, folder file repeat mode or  
all tracks (all files) repeat mode.  
The files contained on the USB media can be played  
at random.  
Search is started when the remote controller’s 5 or 6 button is pressed during play.  
Each time the remote controller’s RANDOM button  
is pressed, random play is changed from ON to OFF  
or vice versa.  
The range of random play differs depending on the  
repeat play setting.  
The search speed can then be changed by pressing the remote controller’s 5 or 6 button.  
Each time the remote controller’s REPEAT button  
is pressed, the modes are selected in the following  
order.  
• Search + / Search -  
Each time the 6 (Search +) or 5 (Search -) button is pressed, the speed is changed by one setting in the  
following sequence.  
OFF  
ALL  
Folder  
1
SEARCH 1 + → SEARCH 2 + → SEARCH 3 + → PLAY → SEARCH 1 + →  
SEARCH 1 – → SEARCH 2 – → SEARCH 3 – → PLAY → SEARCH 1 + →  
Repeat off : All audio files on the USB device are  
played at random.  
Repeat on : The files in the play range of the  
repeat settings are played repeatedly  
at random.  
What appears on the Operationsthatappear  
Search mode  
SEARCH 1 +/-  
Movement  
: All files repeat  
: Folder file repeat  
: 1 file repeat  
monitor display  
（+）1 Search +  
（–）1 Search –  
on the FL display  
（+）1 6  
（–）1 5  
Rapid advance at 2x normal speed  
Rapid reverse at 2x normal speed  
Random play is started when the 2 button is pressed  
while ON is selected.  
（+）2 Search +  
（+）2 6  
Rapid advance at 4x normal speed  
SEARCH 2 +/-  
SEARCH 3 +/-  
（–）2 Search –  
（–）2 5  
Rapid reverse at 4x normal speed  
Rapid advance at 10x normal  
speed  
Note:  
（+）3 Search +  
（+）3 6  
When playing files in folder file repeat mode, the files  
in the selected main folder will be played repeatedly.  
(Play does not include files in the subfolders.)  
（–）3 Search –  
（–）3 5  
Rapid reverse at 10x normal speed  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
OTHER  
File systems supported  
Status displays  
• When USB media is partitioned, the unit can read only the first partition. Furthermore, depending on the  
partition configuration, it may not be possible to read the partition correctly.  
When any of the displays listed in the table below have appeared on the FL display, it means that the unit is  
one of the statuses listed below.  
Formats  
FAT16 / FAT32  
Hierarchy  
Hierarchical levels of folders whose files can be played hierarchically: Max.  
8 levels excluding the root  
First only  
700  
65535  
What appears on the  
What appears on the FL display  
Status  
monitor display  
Partition  
Maximum number of folders  
Maximum number of files  
No USB storage device is  
connected.  
N O D E V I C E  
No device  
Maximum number of folder 64 Byte (VFAT long names supported)  
characters  
Maximum number of file 640Byte (VFAT long names supported) Extensions (.xxx) included  
characters  
An unrecognizable device has  
been connected.  
U N K N O W N D E V I C E  
U N K N O W N F S  
Unknown device  
Unknown FS  
USB media with an unsupported  
file system has been connected.  
Playable file formats  
The overcurrent protection  
function of the unit’s USB  
connector has been triggered.  
• Copyright-protected audio files cannot be played using the unit.  
• Playlists are not supported.  
O V E R C U R R E N T  
N O A U D I O F I L E  
Over current  
• Even if the selected music files were recorded in a format supported by the unit, it may not be possible to  
play them or noise may be heard.  
USB media with no playback  
files recorded on it has been  
connected.  
No audio file  
Can’t play  
Character  
Standards  
The unit has attempted to play a  
non-playable file.  
Extension information  
supported  
Standard  
Range supported  
C A N ‘ T P L A Y  
supported  
Sampling frequency 32kHz – 48kHz  
Supported media  
mp3  
mp3  
wma  
ID3V1/ID3V2 MPEG-1 Layer-III  
32kbps – 320kbps  
(CBR/VBR)  
Bit rate  
• Do not connect a personal computer to the unit's USB connector. Music cannot be imported to the unit's  
USB connector from a personal computer.  
MP3  
Sampling frequency 16kHz – 24kHz  
MPEG-2 LSF Layer-  
III  
• It may not be possible to use a media device that has been plugged into a USB card reader.  
• Depending on the USB media being used, it may take some time to read the data.  
ID3V1/ID3V2  
8kbps – 160kbps  
(CBR/VBR)  
Bit rate  
• Depending on the USB media being used, it may not be possible to read the data correctly or the power may  
not be supplied correctly.  
Sampling frequency 32kHz – 48kHz  
Microsoft Windows  
WMA  
WMA Tag  
Media Audio 9.2  
supported  
8kbps – 160kbps (CBR)  
Peak 384kbps (VBR)  
• Users should bear in mind that we will not be liable in any way for any losses of or changes to data or for any  
media malfunctions which occur while the USB media device is being used. We recommend that you make  
a backup of any data stored on USB media before using the media in this unit.  
Bit rate  
AAC header  
(iTunes  
content  
Sampling frequency 8kHz – 48kHz  
AAC  
WAV  
m4a  
wav  
MPEG-2/4 AAC LC  
8kbps – 320kbps  
(CBR/VBR)  
Specifications  
Connections supported  
Compliance with USB 2.0 full speed  
Bit rate  
Devices in compliance with the USB Mass Storage Class standard  
− USB flash memory devices (sizes of 256MB and up supported)  
− HDDs supporting USB connections  
− When a portable audio player is used as a USB memory devices  
SCSI  
information)  
Sampling frequency 32kHz – 48kHz  
RIFF Waveform  
Audio　Format  
None  
Bit number  
16bit  
Sub class  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
MANUAL PRESET MEMORY  
RECALLING A PRESET STATION  
You can fast forward the preset stations, press  
the 2 continuously.  
TUNER OPERATION (PRESET MEMORY)  
PRESET MEMORY  
4.  
5.  
When the desired preset station is received,  
cancel the preset scan operation by pressing  
the CL button or P.SCAN button on the remote  
controller.  
3.  
2. 4.  
1.  
3.  
With this unit you can preset up to 60 FM/AM stations  
in any order.  
For each station, you can memorize the frequency  
and reception mode if desired.  
2.  
3.  
PRESET CHANNEL LIST DISPLAY  
2.  
2.  
AUTO PRESET MEMORY  
A complete list of the broadcast channels stored in  
this unit can be displayed.  
This function automatically scans the FM and AM  
band and enters all stations with proper signal  
strength into the memory.  
1.  
(Using the unit)  
4. 2.  
5.  
1. 3. 2.  
Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to  
the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING”  
section).  
(Using the unit)  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Select the desired preset station by pressing  
the 1 or 2 cursor buttons on the front panel.  
1.  
2.  
4.  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.  
“– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the  
display.  
(Using the remote controller)  
P
ress the TUNE button twice within two  
Select the preset number by pressing the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons, while this is still blinking  
(approx. 5 seconds)  
1.  
2.  
Press the TUNE button on the remote controller  
twice within two seconds to switch to the  
TUNER function.  
1.  
seconds on the remote controller.  
Press the 1 or 2 button to tune in the deseired  
preset station.  
Press the MEMORY button again to enter. The  
display stops blinking.  
To select FM , press the BAND button on the  
Press INFO button on the remote controller.  
1.  
2.  
2.  
3.  
Or enter the preset station number with the  
numeric buttons.  
front panel.  
The list of preset channels will be displayed on  
the screen of the TV monitor connected to this  
unit.  
The station is now stored in the specified preset  
memory location.  
While pressing the MEMORY button, press the  
2 cursor button.  
PRESET SCAN  
PRESET LIST  
“AUTO PRESET” will appear on the display,  
and scanning starts from the lowest frequency.  
(Using the remote controller)  
NO. 1 FM 87.10 MHz  
NO. 2 FM 93.10 MHz  
NO. 3 FM 94.70 MHz  
NO.10 FM105.70 MHz  
Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to  
the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING”  
section).  
1.  
Each time the tuner finds a station, scanning  
will pause and the station will be played for five  
seconds.  
3.  
1.  
5.  
4.  
Press the MEMO button on the remote  
controller. “– –“ (preset number) starts blinking  
on the display.  
2.  
During this time, the following operations are  
possible.  
2.  
5.  
RETURN  
NEXT EXIT  
The band can be changed by the BAND button.  
Up to 10 channels can be displayed at a time. If  
there are more than 10 channels, press INFO  
on the remote controller once more to display  
the next page.  
4.  
Enter the desired preset number by pressing  
the numeric buttons.  
3.  
If no button is pressed during this period, the  
current station is memorized in location Preset  
01.  
4.  
5.  
(Using the remote controller)  
Note:  
• When entering a single digit number (2 for example),  
either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few  
seconds.  
Press the TUNE button twice within two  
seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
2.  
If you wish to skip the current station, press the  
3 cursor button during this period, this station  
is skipped and auto presetting continues.  
The list display will disappear automatically in 5  
seconds.  
Press the P.SCAN button on the remote  
controller.  
Operation stops automatically when all 60  
preset memory positions are filled or when  
auto scanning attains the highest end of all  
bands. If you desire to stop the auto preset  
memory at anytime, press the CLEAR button.  
“PRESET SCAN” appears on the front display  
and then the preset station with the lowest  
preset number is recalled first.  
Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1  
→ No.2 → etc.) for 10 seconds each.  
3.  
No stored preset number will be skipped.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS  
SORTING PRESET STATIONS  
NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION.  
After selecting the first character to be entered,  
press the MEMORY or ENTER button, or press  
the MEMO button on the remote controller.  
5.  
You can remove preset stations from the memory  
using the following procedure.  
This function allows the name of each preset channel  
to be entered using alphanumeric characters.  
Before name inputting, you need to store preset  
stations with the preset memory operation.  
The entry in this column is fixed and the next  
column starts to flash. Fill the next column the  
same way.  
2.  
3.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
2. 5. 6.  
To move back and forth between the characters,  
press the 1 / 2 cursor buttons.  
Note:  
• Unused columns should be filled by entering  
blanks.  
If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap in  
the sequential order:  
I.e. the stations are stored as follows  
1) 87.1 MHz  
To save the name, press the MEMORY or  
ENTER button on the front panel, or press the  
MEMO button on the remote controller for more  
than 2 seconds.  
6.  
Recall the preset number to be cleared with  
the method described in “Recalling” a preset  
station.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
2) 93.1 MHz  
3) 94.7 MHz  
10) 105.9 MHz  
Instead of using the 3 and 4 cursor buttons to  
select characters, characters can be input from  
the numeric keys of the remote controller. See  
the below table for a correspondence between  
characters and numeric keys.  
4.  
5.  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel  
or press the MEMO button on the remote  
controller.  
(notice there is no stations programmed for presets  
for 4-9), you can have preset 10 become preset 4:  
To sort the numbers, press and hold the MEMORY  
and the 4 cursor buttons.  
“PRESET SORT” will appear on the display and  
sorting will be done.  
2.  
5.  
6.  
The stored preset number blinks in the display  
for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the CLEAR  
button on the front panel or the CL button on the  
remote controller.  
Ten keypad  
Press, press again, press again, etc.  
A → B → C → 1 → A  
D → E → F → 2 → D  
G → H → I → 3 → G  
J → K → L → 4 → J  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Recall the preset number to be inputted name  
with the method described in “Recalling” a  
preset station.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
“xx CLEAR” appears on the display to indicate  
that the specified preset number has been  
cleared.  
4.  
M → N → O → 5 → M  
P → Q → R → 6 → P  
S → T → U → 7 → S  
V → W → X → 8 → V  
Y → Z → space → 9 → Y  
– → + → / → 0 → –  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel  
or press the MEMO button on the remote  
controller for more than 3 seconds.  
Note:  
•
To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the  
T-MODE and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.  
The left most column of the station name  
indicator flashes, indicating the character entry  
ready status.  
When you press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons  
on the front panel or the remote controller,  
alphabetic and numeric characters will be  
displayed in the following order:  
A ↔ B ↔ C ... Z ↔ 1 ↔ 2 ↔ 3 ..... 0 ↔ – ↔ +  
↔ / ↔ (Blank) ↔ A  
UP →  
← DOWN  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CHECKING THE XM SIGNAL STRENGTH  
AND RADIO ID  
XM RADIO OVERVIEW  
LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO  
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE  
This unit is the XM Ready® receiver.You can receive XM Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Mini-Tuner  
and Home Dock (each sold separately) and subscribing to XM service.  
Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must  
first select the input source on the unit.  
About XM Radio  
1.  
XM is North America’s number one satellite radio company, offering an extraordinary variety of commercial-free  
music, plus the best in premier sports, news, talk radio, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming,  
broadcast in superior digital audio quality coast to coast. For more information, or to subscribe, U.S. customers  
visit xmradio.com or call XM Listener Care at 1-800- XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers visit  
xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).  
1.  
2.  
XM Ready® Legal  
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold  
separately) to receive XM service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack,  
manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with  
the XM satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee  
may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated  
with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents)  
and 1-877-GETXMSR (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at  
xmradio.com and xmradio.ca. Only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.  
©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.  
Press the T.DISP button 2 times to display the  
signal status.  
1.  
X M S A T :  
X M T E R R :  
1.  
2.  
• The top line of the display shows the strength of  
the signal received from satellite, while the bottom  
line displays the strength of the terrestrial signal  
received.  
XM Ready® Subscription  
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-  
Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and  
begin receiving XM programming.There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM  
Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the Radio ID below for reference.  
• An  
mark indicates the strength of the stronger  
of the satellite and terrestrial signals.  
• The display changes as shown below according to  
the receiving condition.  
(Using the unit)  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
“TUNER”.  
SIGNAL: STRONG  
(Signal strength is strong)  
1.  
2.  
Note:  
The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
X M  
:
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800-  
XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at https://activate.  
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677).You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal  
from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10-15 minutes, but during peak  
busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access  
the full lineup on your XM Ready audio system you are done.  
SIGNAL: GOOD  
(Signal strength is good)  
(Using the remote controller)  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
X M  
:
SIGNAL: MARGINAL  
(Signal strength is marginal)  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
X M  
:
:
:
SIGNAL:WEAK  
(Signal strength is poor)  
X M  
SIGNAL: NON  
(Loss of the signal)  
X M  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
When the channel Artist name/Song title is  
displayed:  
SWITCHING XM INFORMATION IN THE FRONT  
PANEL DISPLAY  
Adjust the antenna location until signal strength  
is good or strong.  
Press the AMP button on the remote  
controller.  
2.  
3.  
1.  
2.  
You can display XM information (such as artist name/  
song title, category or signal status) for the channel  
currently selected in the front panel display.  
Select channel 0 (XM000) with the 3 or  
4 cursor buttons on the unit or the remote  
controller.  
PresstheINFObutton.Thefollowinginformation  
will be displayed.  
N A M E / T I T L E  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
:DVD  
:XM  
D a v i d B o w i e  
B o w i e / F a m e  
3.  
SURR-MODE :AUTO  
1.  
ZONE A:ON  
SPK:OFF  
ZONE B:OFF  
MAIN VOLUME  
-------------------  
The “NAME/TITLE” is displayed for 2 seconds,  
followed by the artist’s name and song title.  
(Ifartist’snameorsongtitleismorethan14characters  
long, the text is scrolled.)  
When this display appears, press the INFO  
button again. XM information like the following  
will appear.  
3.  
Note:  
Press the T.DISP button to displayed  
INFORMATION.  
1.  
The front Panel display can indicate up to 14  
alphanumeric characters at once. If the information  
contains more than 14 characters, the information  
scrolls from right to left.  
XM INFORMATION  
Channel number/name  
Artist name/Song title  
3.  
XM  
:046  
CHAN  
CAT  
NAME  
:Top Tracks  
:Rock  
:David Bowie  
When the channel category is displayed:  
Channel number/name  
Channel category  
TITLE :Fame  
C A T : R o c k  
SAT  
TERR  
:MARGINAL  
:NON  
• The Radio ID is displayed.  
Satellite signal status  
Terrestrial signal status  
X M O O O : R A D I O I D  
This XM information can also be displayed on a TV  
monitor connected to the unit.  
Press the INFO button again. The information  
display will go out.  
4.  
Channel number/name  
Surround mode  
1.  
Note:  
Notes:  
If the information contains a character that cannot be  
recognized by that unit, the character will be displayed  
with “ ”(space).  
• If “ANTENNA” “TUNER” or “UPGRADE  
TUNER” appears in the front panel display, see  
Troubleshooting (page 77).  
When the channel number/name is displayed:  
•
To change the display content from XM information  
to the unit functions, do so with the DISPLAY  
button.  
X M O 4 6 : T o p T r a  
2.  
3.  
4.  
4 6 : T o p T r a c k s  
(If text is more than 14 characters long, the text is  
scrolled.)  
Note:  
ThefrontPaneldisplaycanindicateupto14alphanumeric  
characters at once. If the information contains more than  
14 characters, the information scrolls from right to left.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
(Using the unit)  
PRESET SEARCH MODE  
CATEGORY SEARCH MODE  
SEARCH MODE  
You can select the desired channel from the category  
allocated to each channel.  
Category being aired can be only selected.  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
“TUNER”.  
1.  
You can search for the channel you want to listen to  
using one of three search modes.You can also enter  
the number directly to select the desired channel.  
1.  
3. 2.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Press the ENTER button on the front panel.  
1.  
3.6. 4.5. 2.  
ALL CHANNEL SEARCH MODE  
Press the 1 or 2 button on the front panel to  
select the desired category.  
1.  
3. 2.  
After selecting the category, Press the 3 or 4  
cursor button to select the desired channel of  
the category.  
5.  
You can return to the normal mode by press the  
ENTER button during Category Search Mode.  
6.  
1.  
(Using the remote controller)  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
1.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Press the CAT + or CAT - button.  
1.  
3.  
2.  
After selecting the category, Press the 3 or  
4 button to select the desired channel of the  
5.  
category.  
4.  
2.  
You can return to the normal mode by press the  
ENTER button during Category Search Mode.  
5.  
3.  
2.  
(Using the unit)  
Note:  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
“TUNER”.  
1.  
Category search automatically ends 10 seconds after  
the last operation.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
Press the 1 or 2 cursor button on the front  
panel to select the desired preset channel.  
(Using the unit)  
3.  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
“TUNER”.  
(Using the remote controller)  
1.  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
Press the 3 or 4 cursor button on the front  
panel to select the desired channel.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
1 or 2 button to tune in the desired preset  
channel.  
(Using the remote controller)  
Or enter the preset channel number with the  
numeric buttons.  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
Press and hold the 3 TUNE or 4 TUNE  
button.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
(Using the remote controller)  
CHANNEL DIRECT CALL  
CHECKING THE XM PRESET CHANNEL  
PRESET MEMORY  
You can select the desired channel by directly tapping  
the numeric keypads on the remote controller.  
The preset channel can be checked on the on screen  
display.  
Tune into the desired channel.  
1.  
2.  
You can store the desired channel in the Preset  
Memory.  
In addition to AM and FM, it is possible to preset 50  
XM Satellite Radio channels.  
Press the MEMO button on the remote  
controller. “- -” (preset number) starts blinking  
on the display.  
Enter the desired preset number by pressing  
the numeric buttons.  
3.  
1.  
1.  
3.  
2. 4.  
Note:  
When entering a single digit number (2 for example),  
either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few  
seconds.  
2.  
3.  
3.  
4.  
4.  
2.  
2.  
3.  
(Using the remote controller)  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
1.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
2.  
3.  
Press the F.DIRECT button.  
Press the INFO button. to view a list of tuner  
preset channeI on the on screen display.  
“XM - - -” will appear on the display.  
If there are 10 or more preset channel, press  
the INFO button again.  
4.  
Input the three digit number for your desired  
channel with the numeric keypad on the remote  
controller.  
4.  
XM  
PRESET LIST  
(Using the unit)  
NO. 1 XM010 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 2 XM011 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 3 XM015 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 4 XM022 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 5 XM125 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 6 XM001 Preview  
NO. 7 XM001 Preview  
NO. 8 XM001 Preview  
NO. 9 XM001 Preview  
NO.10 XM001 Preview  
The desired channel will automatically be  
tuned.  
5.  
Tune into the desired channel.  
1.  
2.  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.  
Note:  
”- -” (preset number) starts blinking on the  
If there is no input on the keypad for 5 sec., the input is  
cancelled to return to the original display.  
dispIay.  
Notes:  
- - X M 0 4 0  
•
•
•
•
“LOADING” is displayed while receiving the  
channel or information.  
Note:  
The preset channel indication disappears in about 5  
sec.  
Select the preset number by pressing the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons, While this is still blinking  
(approx. 5 seconds)  
3.  
4.  
“CH UNAUTH” is displayed while updating  
encryption code.  
When the selected channel is not available, “CH  
UNAVL” is dispIayed.  
0 1 X M 0 4 0  
“OFF AIR” is displayed while air is suspended (e.g.  
midnight).  
Press the MEMORY button again to enter.  
The display stops blinking.  
The channel is now stored in the specified  
preset memory location.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
PRESET SCAN  
CLEARING STORED PRESET CHANNELS  
You can remove preset channels from the memory  
using the following procedure.  
2. 3.  
1.  
5.  
2.  
3.  
6.  
2.  
3.  
Press the TUNE button twice within two  
seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
Press the BAND button to select XM band.  
2.  
3.  
Press the P.SCAN button on the remote  
controller.  
Preset channels are recalled in sequence (No.1  
→ No.2 → etc.) for about 10 seconds each.The  
time changes by the received condition. No  
stored preset number will be skipped.  
4.  
Recall the preset number to be cleared with  
the method described in “PRESET SEARCH  
MODE”.  
1.  
Pressing the 2 button during prescanning  
speeds up scanning.  
5.  
Also, pressing the 1 button returns to the  
previous preset channel.  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel  
or press the MEMO button on the remote  
2.  
controller.  
When the desired preset channel is received,  
cancel the preset scan operation by press the  
P. SCAN button.  
6.  
The stored preset number blinks in the display  
3.  
for 5 seconds.WhiIe blinking, press the CLEAR  
button on the front panel or CL button on the  
remote controller.  
“xx CLEAR” appears on the dispIay to indicate  
that the specified preset number has been  
cleared.  
4.  
Notes:  
• To clear all stored preset channel, press and hold the  
T-MODE and the ENTER buttons on the unit for  
two seconds.  
• There are 50 preset channels prepared at the factory  
default. The 50 channels are all set to “CHANNEL  
001”. Each channel can be stored in the preset  
memory. You can search for only the preset  
channels.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CHECKING THE SIRIUS SIGNAL STRENGTH AND  
RADIO ID  
SIRIUS RADIO OVERVIEW  
LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO  
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE  
This unit is the Sirius-Ready receiver. You can receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio by connecting to the  
SiriusConnectTM Home Tuner, Antenna and AC adapter and subscribing the SIRIUS service.  
Before you can listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you  
must first select the input source on the unit.  
INTRODUCING SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO  
1.  
2.  
1.  
2.  
Simply The Best Radio on Radio™ with all your favorite entertainment including  
MUSIC YOU LOVE Incredible variety, original channels, legendary DJs, the latest bands, exclusive live  
performances, and more – it’s all 100% commercial-free  
LIVE SPORTS & EXPERT TALK Complete coverage of the NFL, NASCAR® and NBA, plus College Sports,  
Soccer and more. All the action, all the talk – 24/7  
EXCLUSIVE ENTERTAINMENT & TALK From Howard Stern to Martha Stewart, Blue Collar Comedy to  
political and religious talk, Maxim Radio to COSMO Radio, there’s something for everyone.  
WORLD CLASS NEWS The local and international news you trust from Fox, CNN, NPR® , CNBC, BBC plus  
local weather and traffic every four minutes or less.  
Press the TUNE button on the remote  
controller.  
1.  
Press the T.DISP button 3 times to display the  
signal status on the front display of the unit.  
1.  
2.  
2.  
FAMILY & KIDS It’s G-rated fun for everyone with Radio Disney, Kid’s Stuff and laugh break comedy – plus  
you can always block channels with mature programming.  
S R S A T :  
FREE ONLINE LISTENING Subscribers can hear all 69 music channels, Howard Stern, Martha Stewart and  
much more, for free on sirius.com.  
S R T E R R :  
Questions? Visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca  
• The top line of the display shows the strength of  
the signal received from satellite, while the bottom  
line displays the strength of the terrestrial signal  
received.  
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE  
Listeners can subscribe by visiting SIRIUS on the web at https://activate.siriusradio.com or by calling toll-free at  
1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474). Customers should have their Radio ID and credit card ready.The Radio  
ID can be found by selecting channel 0 on the radio.  
(Using the unit)  
• An  
mark indicates the strength of the stronger  
of the satellite and terrestrial signals.  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
“TUNER”.  
1.  
2.  
• The display changes as shown below according to  
the receiving condition.  
(See the “CHECKING THE SIRIUS SIGNAL STRENGTH AND RADIO ID” p.58)  
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS.  
EXCELENT display  
A WARNING AGAINST REVERSE ENGINEERING:  
S R 　       :  
(Using the remote controller)  
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated  
in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio system.  
GOOD display  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
S R  
:
:
:
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS.  
2.  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio is available in the US for subscribers with addresses in the continental US and  
is available in Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. Required subscription plus compatible  
SIRIUS tuner and antenna are required and sold separately. SIRIUS Programming is subject to change.  
Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and product information. “SIRIUS”  
and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. All rights  
reserved.  
WEAK display  
S R  
NO SIGNAL display  
S R  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
When the Artist name/Song title is displayed:  
This SIRIUS information can also be displayed on a  
TV monitor connected to the unit.  
SWITCHING SIRIUS INFORMATION IN THE FRONT  
PANEL DISPLAY  
Adjust the antenna location until signal strength  
is good or excellent.  
3.  
4.  
N A M E / T I T L E  
You can display SIRIUS information (such as artist  
name, song title, composer name, category or signal  
status) for the channel currently selected in the front  
panel display.  
Select channel 0 (SR000) with the 3 or 4 cursor  
button of the unit or the remote controller.  
P i n k F l o i d /  
F l o i d / M o n e y  
1.  
4.  
1.  
2.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
When the Composer name is displayed:  
C O M P O S E R  
R o g e r W a t e r  
Press the AMP button on the remote  
1.  
controller.  
The “NAME / TITLE” or “COMPOSER” is displayed  
for 2 seconds, followed by the artist name / Song title  
or Composer name.  
(If artist name / song title or composer name is more  
than 14 characters long, the text is scrolled.)  
4.  
PresstheINFObutton.Thefollowinginformation  
2.  
will be displayed.  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
:DVD  
:SIRIUS  
Press the TUNE button on the remote  
1.  
controller.  
• The Radio ID is displayed.  
Select the information with the T.DISP button.  
2.  
SURR-MODE :AUTO  
When the channel category is displayed:  
ZONE A:ON  
ZONE B:OFF  
MAIN VOLUME  
-------------------  
SPK:OFF  
Channel number/name  
Artist name/Song title  
S R O O O : S i r i u s I D  
C A T : R o c k  
Channel number/name  
Composer name  
Notes:  
When this display appears, press the INFO  
button again. SIRIUS information like the  
following will appear.  
3.  
• If “ANTENNA”, “TUNER ERR” or  
“ACQUIRING” appears in the front panel display,  
see Troubleshooting (page 77).  
Channel number/name  
Category  
SIRIUS INFORMATION  
SIRIUS:007  
• To change the display content from SIRIUS  
information to unit functions, do so from the display  
mode. (See “DISPLAY MODE” on page 42)  
Satellite signal status  
Terrestrial signal status  
CHAN  
CAT  
:70s Hits  
:Pop  
NAME  
:1234567890123456  
TITLE :1234567890123456  
CMPOSR:1234567890123456  
Channel number/name  
Surround mode  
SAT  
:EXCELLENT  
:WEAK  
TERR  
When the Channel number/name mode is displayed:  
Press the INFO button again. The information  
display will go out.  
4.  
S R 0 2 4 :  
(If text is more than 14 characters long, the text is  
scrolled.)  
Note:  
•
If the information contains a character that cannot  
be recognized by that unit, the character will be  
displayed with “ ”(space).  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
(Using the remote controller)  
PRESET SEARCH MODE  
CATEGORY SEARCH MODE  
SEARCH MODE  
You can select the desired channel from the category  
allocated to each channel.  
Category being aired can be only selected.  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
You can search for the channel you want to listen to  
using one of three search modes.You can also enter  
the number directly to select the desired channel.  
1.  
3. 2.  
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS  
band.  
2.  
1.  
3.6. 4.5. 2.  
Press the CAT + or − button.  
ALL CHANNEL SEARCH MODE  
3.  
4.  
After selecting the category, press the 3 or 4  
cursor button to select the desired channel of  
the category.  
1.  
3. 2.  
You can return to the normal mode by press the  
ENTER button during Category Search Mode.  
5.  
Note:  
1.  
• Category search ends automatically about 10  
seconds after the last operation.  
1.  
1.  
3.  
2.  
5.  
4.  
2.  
(Using the unit)  
3.  
2.  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
1.  
2.  
3.  
“TUNER”.  
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS  
band.  
3.  
Press the 1 or 2 cursor button on the front  
panel to select the desired preset channel.  
(Using the unit)  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
“TUNER”.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
(Using the unit)  
(Using the remote controller)  
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS  
band.  
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select  
“TUNER”.  
1.  
2.  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
Press the 3 or 4 cursor button on the front  
panel to select the desired channel.  
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS  
band.  
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS  
band.  
2.  
Press the ENTER button on the front panel.  
3.  
4.  
1 or 2 cursor button to tune in the desired  
preset channel.  
3.  
(Using the remote controller)  
Press the 1 or 2 button on the front panel to  
select the desired category.  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
Or enter the preset channel number with the  
numeric buttons.  
After selecting the category, Press the 3 or 4  
cursor button to select the desired channel of  
the category.  
5.  
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS  
band.  
2.  
Press and hold the 3 or 4 cursor button.  
You can return to the normal mode by press the  
ENTER button during Category Search Mode.  
3.  
6.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CHANNEL DIRECT CALL  
CHECKING THE SIRIUS PRESET CHANNEL  
Press the MEMORY button again to enter.  
PRESET MEMORY  
4.  
You can select the desired channel by directly tapping  
the numeric keypads on the remote controller.  
The preset channel can be checked on the on screen  
display.  
The display stops blinking.  
You can store the desired channel in the Preset  
Memory.  
(You can preset 50 SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels  
in addition to FM/AM stations.)  
The channel is now stored in the specified  
preset memory location.  
(Using the remote controller)  
1.  
1.  
3.  
2. 4.  
Tune into the desired channel.  
1.  
2.  
Press the MEMO button on the remote  
controller. “- -” (preset number) starts blinking  
2.  
3.  
on the display.  
3.  
4.  
Enter the desired preset number by pressing  
the numeric buttons.  
3.  
Note:  
4.  
•
When entering a single digit number (2 for example),  
either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few  
seconds.  
2.  
2.  
3.  
(Using the remote controller)  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
To select tuner, press the TUNE button twice  
within two seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS  
band.  
2.  
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS  
2.  
band.  
Press the F.DIRECT button.  
3.  
Press the INFO button. to view a list of tuner  
preset channeI on the on screen display.  
3.  
“SR - - -” will appear on the display.  
Input the three digit number for your desired  
channel with the numeric keypad on the  
remote controller.  
4.  
If there are 10 or more preset channel, press  
the lNFO button again.  
4.  
(Using the unit)  
SIRIUS PRESET LIST  
The desired channel will automatically be  
tuned.  
5.  
Tune into the desired channel.  
1.  
2.  
NO. 1 SR010 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 2 SR011 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 3 SR015 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 4 SR022 XXXXXXXXXX  
NO. 5 SR125 XXXXXXXXXX  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.  
Note:  
”- -” (preset number) starts blinking on the  
dispIay.  
•
If there is no input on the keypad for 5 sec., the input  
is cancelled to return to the original display.  
- - S R 0 4 0  
Notes:  
•
•
•
“UPDATING” is displayed while updating channel  
map.  
Select the preset number by pressing the 1  
or 2 cursor buttons, While this is still blinking  
(approx. 5 seconds)  
3.  
Note:  
“SUB UPDT” is displayed while updating  
subscription.  
•
The preset channel indication disappears in about 5  
sec.  
When the selected channel is not available,  
“INVALID” is dispIayed.  
0 1 S R 0 4 0  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
PRESET SCAN  
CLEARING STORED PRESET CHANNELS  
Tune to the channel that you want to set  
parental lock.  
PARENTAL LOCK  
1.  
2.  
You can remove preset channels from the memory  
using the following procedure.  
This function is used to lock channels you do not  
want to receive.  
Press the T-MODE button on the main unit or  
the P.LOCK button on the remote controller.  
1.  
5.  
2.  
3.  
6.  
SETTING/RELEASING PARENTAL LOCK  
2. 3.  
P A S S W O R D  
3. 5. 2. 5.  
When [PASSWORD ****] appears, use the  
cursor buttons on the main unit or remote  
controller, or the numeric buttons on the remote  
controller, to enter a password (4 digits), then  
press the ENTER button on the main unit or the  
remote controller.  
3.  
Note:  
The password is set to 9999 when shipped from the  
factory.  
2.  
3.  
3.  
P A S W O R D O K !  
Press the TUNE button twice within two  
seconds on the remote controller.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
S R 0 0 1 a b c d e f g  
Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS  
band.  
press the P.SCAN button on the remote  
controller.  
2.  
When the correct password is entered,  
[PASSWORD OK!] is displayed and the display  
flashes “✔” or “:”.  
4.  
5.  
Preset channels are recalled in sequence (No.1  
→ No.2 → etc.) for about 10 seconds each.The  
time changes by the received condition. No  
stored preset number will be skipped.  
3.  
5.  
Set parental lock on/off using the 3 / 4 cursor  
buttons on the main unit or remote controller,  
then confirm the setting using the ENTER  
button on the main unit or remote controller.  
Recall the preset number to be cleared with  
the method described in ”PRESET SEARCH  
1.  
MODE”.  
Pressingthe2cursorbuttonduringprescanning  
speeds up scanning.  
5.  
6.  
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel  
or the MEMO button on the remote controller.  
2.  
“✔” Lock status  
Also, pressing the 1 cursor button returns to  
the previous preset channel.  
“:” Unlock status  
The stored preset number blinks in the display  
3.  
You can unlock all locked channels at this time  
by pressing the CLEAR button on the main  
unit or CL button on the remote controller for 5  
seconds. When “ALL UNLOCK?” is displayed,  
press the ENTER button on the main unit or  
remote controller. “UNLOCKING..” is displayed  
and all locked channels are unlocked.  
for 5 seconds.WhiIe blinking, press the CLEAR  
button on the front panel or CL button on the  
remote controller.  
When the desired preset channel is received,  
cancel the preset scan operation by press the  
P.SCAN button.  
“xx CLEAR” appears on the dispIay to indicate  
that the specified preset number has been  
cleared.  
4.  
Note:  
Notes:  
• If you mistakenly enter the wrong password, you  
• To clear all stored preset channels, press and hold  
the T-MODE and the ENTER buttons on the unit  
for two seconds.  
will be asked to reenter the password.  
• You can exit parental lock mode using the EXIT  
button on the main unit or CLEAR button on the  
remote controller.  
• No sound will be output when you tune to a locked  
channel.  
• Although parental lock can be set for more than one  
channel, all channels will share the same password.  
• You cannot set Parental Lock for Channel 0.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
TEMPORARILY LISTENING TO A LOCKED CHANNEL  
CHANGING THE PASSWORD  
Set to receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio.  
1.  
2.  
Press the T-MODE button on the main unit or  
the P.LOCK button on the remote controller.  
3. 2.  
3. 4. 6. 2.  
When [PASSWORD ****] appears, use the  
cursor buttons on the main unit or remote  
controller, or the numeric button on the remote  
controller, to enter a password (4 digits), then,  
with the cursor located at the far right, press  
the 2 cursor button on the main unit or remote  
controller.  
3.  
P A S W O R D 9 9 9 9  
N E W W O R D _ _ _ _  
3.  
4.  
3.  
When [NEW WORD _ _ _ _] is displayed, enter  
a new password, then press the ENTER button  
on the main unit or remote controller.  
4.  
2.  
3.  
2.  
W O R D C H A N G E D  
When [WORD CHANGED] is displayed, the  
password has been changed.  
5.  
6.  
Press the EXIT button on the main unit or CL  
button on the remote controller.  
6.  
Tune to the locked channel you want to listen  
1.  
to.  
Note:  
If the unit is reset the password will be reset to 9999.  
(See page 77)  
Press the T-MODE button on the main unit or  
the P.LOCK button on the remote controller.  
2.  
When [PASSWORD ****] appears, use the  
3.  
cursor buttons on the main unit or remote  
controller, or the numeric buttons on the remote  
controller, to enter a password (4 digits), then  
press the ENTER button on the main unit or  
remote controller.  
When the correct password is entered,  
[PASSWORD OK!] is displayed and you can  
temporarily listen to the channel.  
4.  
Note:  
• You can cancel temporary listening by pressing the  
EXIT button on the main unit or CL button on the  
remote controller.  
• Since the purpose is to listen temporarily to a  
locked channel, lock status is restored if the channel  
is changed, the function is changed, the power  
is turned on/off, or any other such operation is  
performed. If you want to release lock status, see  
“Setting/Releasing Parental Lock.”  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Note:  
• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features  
ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE ZONE SPEAKER A  
TERMINALS  
When the ZONE setting mode is engaged, one  
of the following screens appears on the display  
for 10 seconds.  
ZONE SYSTEM  
2.  
The ZONE System mode allows the same source  
or different sources to be heard in two ZONEs other  
than where this unit is installed.  
can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page  
39.)  
This unit allows you to connect another set of  
speakers amp and place them in a different ZONE or  
separated area for Iistening to music.  
Notes for ZONE Speaker  
* Display when ZONE A is selected  
• The ZONE Speaker mode can be set for only one of  
the ZONE A.  
To use the ZONE system, connect the audio from the  
ZONE OUT A and B AUDIO output terminals to the  
ZONE A and B amps.  
Z A D V D  
- 1 8 d B  
3.  
4.  
• The ZONE SPEAKER output can be used when  
Surround Back Speaker = “NONE, Z-SPK” in the  
SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER SETUP,  
page 33)  
* Display when ZONE B is selected  
If a surround back channel speaker or speaker C  
(see page 20) are not used in the ZONE where this  
unit is installed, the ZONE speaker system can be  
used with the amp for the surround back channel.  
Z B D V D ( D 2 )  
• “The Surr. Back Speakers are in use” is displayed  
when the ZONE SPEAKER button is pressed when  
the Surround Back Speaker is not set to “NONE,  
Z-SPK” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See  
SPEAKER SETUP, page 33)  
Select the input source using the INPUT  
SELECTOR knob on the main unit or the  
function button on the remote controller.  
3.  
This unit supports ZONE system functions such as  
source selectors, ZONE speaker output, sleep timers  
and remote control.  
• The ZONE speaker mode cannot be used at the same  
time as the speaker C. When connecting for ZONE  
use, set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the rear  
panel to OFF.  
Set the ZONE volume to be used by the ZONE  
4.  
system to taste either by turning the VOLUME  
knob on the main unit or by pressing the  
VOLUME +/- buttons on the remote controller.  
1.  
5.  
• When the unit is put in ZONE SPEAKER mode and  
ZSP A has been set as the Surround Back Speaker  
(page 21), the ZONE SPEAKER function can be  
turned on automatically simply by pressing the  
SOURCE button.  
ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE ZONE OUT  
TERMINALS  
Note:  
• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features  
can also be set using the MAIN MENU.  
(See page 39)  
3.  
5.  
3.  
4.  
• The volume for ZONE B cannot be set on the main  
unit. Control the volume by adjusting it on the amp  
connected to ZONE B OUT.  
4.  
To cancel this function, press the ZONE A or B  
button on the remote controller (after pressing  
the AMP button on the remote controller).  
5.  
Press the ZONE SPEAKER (Z.SPKR) button  
on the remote controller.  
1.  
When the ZONE SPEAKER setting mode is  
engaged, one of the following screens appears  
on the display for 10 seconds.  
2.  
“MULTI” indicator on the front panel will be  
turned off.  
1.  
5.  
* Display when ZONE SPEAKER A is selected  
Z S A D V D - 1 8 d B  
3.  
5.  
Select the input source using the INPUT  
SELECTOR knob on the main unit or the  
function button on the remote controller.  
3.  
4.  
Set the ZONE volume to be used by the ZONE  
4.  
Press the ZONE A or B button on the remote  
controller.  
system to your own preference, either by  
turning the VOLUME knob on the main unit or  
by pressing the VOLUME +/- buttons on the  
remote controller.  
1.  
To cancel this function, press the Z.SPKR  
button on the remote controller (after pressing  
the AMP button on the remote controller).  
5.  
“MULTI” indicator on the front panel will be  
turned off.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Notes for the Multi ZONE System  
OPERATION OF THE MULTI ZONE OUTPUTS WITH  
THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM ZONE A  
OPERATION OF THE MULTI ZONE OUTPUTS WITH  
THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM ZONE B  
OPERATION OF THE ZONE SPEAKER OUTPUTS  
WITH THE REMOTE CONTROL  
• If the Tuner (FM or AM) is active in the main  
ZONE, you can not control any function of the tuner.  
In this case, You must listen to the same station as the  
main ZONE.  
The following operations can be performed when  
using an RC101 remote controller (sold separately).  
The following operations can be performed when  
using an RC101 remote controller (sold separately).  
To switch to ZONE SPEAKER SYSTEM A control,  
perform the following operations with the RC101 set  
to ZONE A.  
• DMP (USB) operations cannot be performed using  
RC101 (sold separately).  
CHANGE THE ZONE CONTROL COMMANDS (RC101)  
FOR ZONE A  
CHANGE THE ZONE CONTROL COMMANDS (RC101)  
FOR ZONE B  
3.  
1.  
1.  
2.  
ZONE A output can be operated from a room where  
the unit is not installed. This requires a separately  
sold IR receiver. (For connections, see page 21.)  
ZONE B output can be operated from a room where  
the unit is not installed. This requires a separately  
sold IR receiver. (For connections, see page 21.)  
(When operating the unit by Multi ZONE connected)  
• ZONE A: ZONE A Control (Default)  
• ZONE B: ZONE B Control  
Change the control commands for each ZONE.  
2.  
1.  
1. Press SET button and POWER ON button until  
Change the control commands for each ZONE.  
the SEND indicator blinks twice.  
Then backlight flashes.  
2.  
1.  
2. Press the DVD button.  
Note  
1. Press SET button and ZONE button until the  
Press the TV button at this time to return to the ZONE  
settings.  
SEND indicator blinks twice.  
Then backlight flashes.  
1. Press SET button and ZONE button until the  
3. Press ENTER button once to lock in the code.  
SEND indicator blinks twice.  
2. Press B ZONE button.  
When the procedure is successful, the SEND  
indicator will blink twice.  
Then backlight flashes.  
When the procedure is successful, the SEND  
indicator will blink twice.  
2. Press A ZONE button.  
These buttons change a special code of each  
ZONE.  
When the procedure is successful, the SEND  
indicator will blink twice.  
These buttons change a special code of each  
ZONE.  
POWER ON/OFF  
SOURCE  
POWER ON/OFF  
SOURCE  
VOL +/–  
MUTE  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION  
CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS  
Press the desired SOURCE button.  
1.  
2. Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component.  
• For details, refer to the component’s user guide.  
• It may not be possible to operate some models.  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TV (TV MODE)  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD (DVD MODE)  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DSS (DSS MODE)  
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TV on and off  
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DVD player on and off  
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the satellite broadcasting  
POWER OFF  
POWER ON  
HDMI  
Turns the TV off(*)  
Turns the TV on(*)  
POWER OFF  
POWER ON  
HDMI  
Turns the DVD player off(*)  
Turns the DVD player on(*)  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
Calls up the setup menu of the  
tuner on and off  
HDMI  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
Display the information of the  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
Display the information of TV(*)  
Moves the cursor for setting (*)  
Enters the setting(*)  
Z.SPKR  
ZONE A/B  
A/D  
Z.SPKR  
ZONE A/B  
A/D  
Z.SPKR  
ZONE A/B  
A/D  
ATT  
7.1 IN  
ATT  
SPKR A/B  
7.1 IN  
ATT  
7.1 IN  
SPKR A/B  
SOURCE  
AMP  
SPKR A/B  
SOURCE  
AMP  
SOURCE  
AMP  
INPUT 3 / 4  
DISPLAY  
MUTE  
INPUT 3 / 4  
DISPLAY  
MUTE  
INPUT 3 / 4  
SETUP  
DVD player(*)  
AMP function enabled  
SURR  
VOLUME+/-  
INFO  
SURR  
DISPLAY  
MUTE  
SURR  
VOLUME+/-  
INFO  
Cursor  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
satellite broadcasting tuner(*)  
Moves the cursor for setting  
Enters the setting  
VOLUME+/-  
TOP  
INFO  
Cursor  
ENTER  
MENU  
Calls up the top menu of DVD disc(*)  
Displays the disc information(*)  
"Moves the cursor for setting in  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
Calls up the menu(*)  
Exits from MENU(*)  
Calls up the menu  
Exits from MENU(*)  
Inputs the numeric  
EXIT  
0-9,+10  
Cursor  
Inputs the numeric(*)  
Clears the inputting(*)  
Turns the TV on and off  
Select the TV video input  
Selects TV channel up or down  
"On Screen Display"" mode  
Enters the setting  
0-9  
T.TONE(CL)  
TV POWER  
TV INPUT  
BASS/CH  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
T.TONE(CL)  
TV POWER  
TV INPUT  
BASS/CH  
Clears the inputting(*)  
Turns the TV on and off  
Select the TV video input  
Selects the satellite broadcasting  
Calls up the menu of DVD disc  
Exits from SETUP MENU(*)  
PAUSE  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
STOP  
Skips forward or previous  
tuner channel up or down  
(*) RC003SR dose not have the PRESET code library for  
this key  
(*) RC003SR dose not have the PRESET code library  
for this key  
Previous/Next  
chapter/track  
Rewind/Forward  
0-9,+10  
Searchs forward or backward  
Inputs the numeric(*)  
Clears the inputting(*)  
Select REPEAT PLAY(*)  
Select RANDOM PLAY(*)  
Turns the TV on and off  
Select the TV video input  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
T.TONE(CL)  
REPEAT  
RANDOM  
TV POWER  
TV INPUT  
TREBLE-/+  
BASS-/+  
(*) RC003SR dose not have the PRESET code library  
for this key  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD (CD MODE)  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE MODE)  
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ UNIVERSAL DOCK (AUX MODE)  
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD player on and off  
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TAPE deck on and off  
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK  
(Dock connector) ON and OFF  
POWER OFF  
POWER ON  
HDMI  
Turns the CD player off(*)  
Turns the CD player on(*)  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
Enters the setting(*)  
Calls up the menu(*)  
PAUSE  
POWER OFF  
POWER ON  
HDMI  
Turns the TAPE deck off  
Turns the TAPE deck on  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
PAUSE  
POWER OFF  
Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK  
(Dock connector) OFF  
Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK  
(Dock connector) ON  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
MODE  
Z.SPKR  
ZONE A/B  
A/D  
Z.SPKR  
ZONE A/B  
A/D  
POWER ON  
HDMI  
ATT  
SPKR A/B  
7.1 IN  
ATT  
7.1 IN  
Z.SPKR  
ZONE A/B  
A/D  
SPKR A/B  
SOURCE  
AMP  
SOURCE  
AMP  
ATT  
7.1 IN  
INPUT 3 / 4  
DISPLAY  
MUTE  
INPUT 3 / 4  
DISPLAY  
MUTE  
SPKR A/B  
SOURCE  
AMP  
SURR  
VOLUME+/-  
INFO  
SURR  
INPUT 3 / 4  
SETUP  
DISPLAY  
MUTE  
VOLUME+/-  
TOP  
INFO  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
Select contents Up  
Enter the setting  
ENTER  
MENU  
PAUSE  
Cursor  
SURR  
VOLUME+/-  
INFO  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
PLAY  
STOP  
Previous/Next  
PLAY  
STOP  
Skips forward or previous  
Cursor Up  
ENTER  
Cursor Down  
MENU  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
STOP  
Skips forward or previous  
Select contents Down  
Call up the menu  
PAUSE  
chapter/track  
Rewind/Forward  
0-9,+10  
Searchs forward or backward  
Inputs the numeric(*)  
Clears the inputting(*)  
Select REPEAT PLAY(*)  
Select RANDOM PLAY(*)  
Turns the TV on and off  
Select the TV video input  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
Previous/Next  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
STOP  
Skips forward or previous  
T.TONE(CL)  
REPEAT  
chapter/track  
Rewind/Forward  
0-9  
Searchs forward or backward  
Inputs the numeric  
Clears the inputting  
Previous/Next  
RANDOM  
TV POWER  
TV INPUT  
TREBLE-/+  
BASS-/+  
T.TONE(CL)  
TV POWER  
TV INPUT  
TREBLE-/+  
BASS-/+  
chapter/track  
Turns the TV on and off  
Select the TV video input  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
Rewind/Forward  
REPEAT  
RANDOM  
Searchs forward or backward  
Select REPEAT PLAY  
Select RANDOM PLAY  
Turns the TV on and off  
Select the TV video input  
AMP function enabled  
AMP function enabled  
TV POWER  
TV INPUT  
TREBLE-/+  
BASS-/+  
(*) RC003SR dose not have the PRESET code library  
for this key  
RC003SR dose not have the PRESET code library for  
this device  
RC003SR dose not have the PRESET code library for  
this device  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
PRESET MODE  
PROGRAMMING WITH THE 4-DIGIT CODE  
SCANNING THE CODE TABLE  
BASIC OPERATION (REMOTE CONTROLLER)  
NORMAL MODE  
(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment  
products)  
2.  
3.  
This remote controller is preset with remote control  
codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers.  
The preset codes areTV, CD, DVD and DSS.Settings  
can be made in one of two ways.  
When the preset codes are set, the following codes  
are contained in the source button of the remote  
controller.  
1.  
1.  
(
When operating Marantz AV equipment products)  
2.  
This remote controller is preset with a total of 12 types  
of remote codes, including Marantz TV (television),  
DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (satellite broadcasting  
tuner), TUNER, CD, CD-R, DMP, TAPE (tape deck),  
AUX1, AUX2, and AMP (amplifier).  
2.  
3.  
5.  
Learning is not necessary for Marantz products. You  
can use these products without setting any codes.  
Press and hold down the SOURCE button for the  
appliance which should be controlled and press  
SET button until the indicator blinks twice.Then  
back light flushes.  
1.  
See the attached manufacturer number list for the  
preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and  
other settings.  
1. Press the SOURCE button.  
For this example, press DVD.  
Remote controller  
source name  
TV  
Corresponding preset Device name  
code  
Pressing the SOURCE button once changes  
the remote control to the settings for the source  
that was pressed.  
To change the amplifier on other source, press  
the SOURCE button twice (double-click). The  
code is sent, and then the amplifier source  
changes to DVD.  
2. Press the 4-digit code by numeric buttons for  
appliance (code table at the end of this book)  
Display 4-digit code on the LCD.  
Switch on the appliance which should be  
controlled.  
TV  
DVD  
Television  
DVD player  
CD player  
1.  
2.  
DVD  
CD  
CD  
SATELLITE  
Press and hold down the SOURCE button for  
appliance which should be controlled and press  
SET button until the indicator blinking twice.  
Then back light flushes.  
DSS  
Satellite broadcasting  
tuner equipment  
Importants:  
• Some codes may be not match your equipment.  
In this case, you can use LEARN mode to store these  
codes.  
Aim the remote control at the appliance and  
slowly alternate between pressing INPUT 3  
button and the SOURCE ON/OFF button for the  
appliance.  
3.  
SETTING THE BACK LIGHT  
When the procedure is successful, “OK” is  
displayed on the LCD.  
Pressing the Light button located on the side of  
the remote controller lights the remote controller’s  
backlight.Pressingthebuttonagainwhilethebacklight  
is lit lights the backlight for another 2 seconds.  
To turn off back light, press and hold down the SET  
and OFF button until indicator blinks twice.  
To turn on it again, press and hold down the SET and  
ON button until indicator blinks twice.  
• The preset codes do not cover full functions.  
If you need extra function, use LEARN mode to  
store extra function.  
Display the setup number on the LCD.  
• When the batteries are getting weak, the preset  
procedure is not successful.  
Note:  
If “NG” is displayed on the LCD, then repeat steps 1  
through 2 and try entering the same code again.  
Initial is back light ON.  
Stop when the appliance turns off.  
4.  
5.  
Press ENTER button once to lock in the code.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CHECKING THE CODE  
RESETTING THE CODE  
LEARN MODE  
Select the button to be learned.  
4.  
This remote controller is capable of learning and  
storing codes used by other remote controls that you  
already own.  
For codes which are not learned, the remote  
controller will transmit either the Marantz preset  
codes from the initial settings, or remote codes from  
another manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set  
by the customer.  
• LEARN indicator stop to blink.  
Notes:  
• The learning function is unavailable for all SOURCE  
1.  
1.  
2.  
buttons and HDMI button in any mode.  
1.  
• The learning function is unavailable for all buttons  
in TUNER mode and AMP mode.  
3.  
4.  
The receiver sensor for the remote controller signals is  
located at the top of the remote controller.  
Press and hold the button of the original remote  
controller to learn until “OK” is displayed on the  
LCD.  
5.  
2.  
1.  
Notes:  
• This remote controller is capable to learn around 120  
codes.  
Press and hold down the SOURCE button  
for appliance which should be controlled and  
press SET button until the indicator blinking  
twice.  
1.  
2.  
• When the batteries are getting weak , the learning  
procedure is not successful.  
Press and hold down the SOURCE button for  
appliance which should be controlled and press  
SET button until the indicator blinking twice then  
back light flushes.  
1.  
• When “NG” is displayed on the LCD, repeat  
this step.  
LEARNING PROCEDURE  
Then back light flushes.  
Press the INFO button.  
Press the below codes to reset.  
2.  
3.  
Place the remote controller so that its infrared  
1.  
signal transmitter is facing the infrared signal  
receiver on the Marantz remote controller at a  
distance of about 0.05 m (2 inches).  
TV : 1000  
DVD : 2000  
CD : 3000  
DSS : 4000  
The indicator will blink twice.  
To setup code for all digits is displayed on the  
LCD in 3 seconds.  
• When the memory of the remote controller  
is full, “FULL” is displayed on the LCD. If you  
want to learn the code, you should erase  
other learned button.  
0.05 m  
Note:  
After this procedure, the selected SOURCE button is  
set initial code.  
Repeat steps and to learn other buttons in  
same SOURCE.  
6.  
4
5
Press and hold down the SET and SETUP  
buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.  
2.  
Repeat steps to to learn other SOURCE.  
7.  
8.  
3 6  
When you have finished programming the  
remote controller, press the SET button, then  
LEARN indicator stops blinking and exits from  
the LEARN mode.  
Select the SOURCE button to select the  
SOURCE, the SOURCE name is displayed on  
the LCD.  
3.  
Notes:  
• When “NG” is displayed on the LCD once again,  
the transmitting code is unavailable for remote  
controller, or the transmitting signal is intercepted  
by noise.  
• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minute  
while in the LEARN mode, the remote controller  
automatically exits from the LEARN mode.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Erasing the code by SOURCE  
Erasing the all SOURCES  
ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES  
(RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS)  
1. Press and hold down the SET and SETUP  
Press and hold down the SET and SETUP  
1.  
buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.  
buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.  
Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons,  
sources, and by all memory contents.  
Erasing the code by buttons  
Press and hold down the SET and SETUP  
buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.  
1.  
2. Press and hold down the HDMI button and  
press the learned SOURCE button twice to be  
erased.  
Press and hold down the HDMI button and  
press POWER ON and POWER OFF button.  
2.  
3.  
• LEARN indicator lights.  
• “ERASE” is displayed on the LCD.  
Select the SOURCE button to select the button  
to be erased.  
2.  
The source name is displayed on the LCD.  
Press ENTER button to continue erasing.  
• “ERASE” is displayed on the LCD and the  
mode returns to LEARN mode.  
3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.  
• The indicator blinks twice and the mode  
returns to LEARN mode.  
• To cancel the erasing operation, do not  
press ENTER button and simply touch any  
other button.  
• To cancel the erasing operation, do not  
press ENTER button and simply touch any  
other button.  
Press and hold down the HDMI button and  
press the learned button twice to be erased.  
3.  
• “ERASE” is displayed on the LCD and the  
mode returns to LEARN mode.  
4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET  
button.  
4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET  
button.  
Note:  
Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code,  
or there will leave empty if the button has no factory  
preset code.  
To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET  
button.  
4.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CONFIRMING MACROS  
Press and hold the SET and MACRO button  
until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and  
MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.  
When you are finished programming macros,  
press and hold the ENTER button until the  
display returns to normal mode (Turn off the  
LEARN and MACRO indicators) .  
MACRO MODE  
1.  
2.  
4.  
Macros may be confirmed using following  
procedure.  
PROGRAMMING MACROS  
Macrosmakeitpossibletouseasinglefunctionbutton  
to perform more complex series of operations that  
would normally require pressing several buttons.  
A single MACRO can be programmed to perform up  
to 10 steps in sequence.  
• In the macro mode, it is possible to program  
the memory to perform macros containing  
up to 10 steps.  
3.  
5.  
• Macros cannot be programmed for the  
MEMO, cursor, ENTER, VOLUME+/- and  
CL buttons.  
A typical example of such a series might be as  
follows:  
Press the numeric button for which you wish to  
program a series of operations.  
• Turn this unit’s power on  
1.  
1.  
Press the 1 button.  
↓
• “M1-01” is displayed on the LCD.  
• Switch this unit's input source to DVD  
↓
• Turn the TV’s power on  
2.  
↓
• Set the DVD player to play.  
Press and hold the MACRO and MENU  
1.  
buttons until the LEARN, MACRO indicators  
and MACRO are displayed blinking on the  
LCD.  
• No signals may be transmitted during macro  
programming.  
• If selected macro number has already been  
set the program, the LCD will blink.  
• The various steps that make up a macro are  
set initially to be sent one after another in 1  
second intervals, however these intervals may be  
shortened to as little as 0.5 seconds or lengthened  
to as much as 5 seconds using the setup mode.  
Note:  
Press the function buttons and command  
button for the operations you wish to program  
as a macro in the sequence.  
3.  
If, while programming, no buttons are pressed for  
approximately 1 minute, the remote controller will  
automatically return to normal mode, and no macro  
will be programmed in the memory.  
• In the macro mode, the number of steps the macro  
is displayed with Macro list number.  
For example, press DVD button and PLAY  
button.  
Press the numeric button to be confirmed.  
2.  
• Macros may be programmed 6 list.  
Press DVD Button (DVD Function)  
Let’s use the example of macro number 1, by  
pressing “1” button.  
MACRO button + numeric button (Example :  
Macro list No.1 → MACRO button + “1”)  
• LEARN, MACRO indicators and M1-01 are  
displayed blinking.  
Program method of MACRO  
0
↓
1.  
Press PLAY Button (Fixed 1st step)  
Press the VOLUME button.  
3.  
3.  
4.  
• M1-01 is displayed and LEARN is  
disappeared.  
• The number of steps in the macro is displayed on  
LCD and this number increases by 1 with each  
button pressed.  
3.  
1.  
• Each macro number can be programmed to  
perform up to 10 steps in sequence.  
• The programmed operation is transmitting.  
Note:  
When programing the amplifier's input source in the  
macro program, first press the AMP button, and press  
the source button.  
2.  
(In the case of DVD input: AMP → DVD)  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
USING MACROS  
EXAMPLES OF MACRO PROGRAMS  
Repeat step 3. until the last number of the  
Press the cursor button (3 or 4) to select the  
number of macro to be edited.  
4.  
5.  
3.  
macro is displayed.  
The following procedure will show how to use macro  
buttons for which you have programmed macros.  
Example 1  
• The display will return to step 1..  
• The programmed operation is displayed  
after the number of macro is displayed.  
Change the input source for the unit to CD and play  
the 3rd track on a CD in the CD player.  
• The each programmed operation is  
transmitting when the number of the macro  
is displayed.  
• The number of macro can be changed with  
the cursor button.  
1.  
2.  
1.  
• To rewrite an existing macro step, simply  
press function button and programed for the  
new step. The old step will be erased and  
rewritten with the new step.  
To return the normal mode, press and hold  
down the ENTER button until MACRO is  
disappeared on the LCD.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
• To insert a new step in between existing  
steps in a macro, after step 3. press the  
MEMO button, then press the button for the  
newstep.Thenumbersoftheotherstepswill  
be adjusted accordingly to accommodate  
the new step. Since only 10 steps may be  
stored in any macro, the tenth step will be  
erased if an step is inserted when the total  
number of steps is already 10.  
3.  
6.  
Press the MACRO button  
1.  
EDITING MACROS  
• MACRO indicator and MACRO is displayed  
on the LCD.  
Macros may be edited using following procedure.  
4.  
3.  
7.  
1.  
5.  
4.  
7.  
2.  
3.  
1.  
• To erase a step in a macro, after step 3. call  
up the number of the step to be erased and  
press the CL button.  
Press the numeric button for programmed  
number and send the programmed code step  
by step.  
2.  
2.  
Press and hold the MACRO and SET button  
until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and  
MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.  
1.  
Press the ENTER button to return step 1.  
4.  
5.  
↓
Press and hold the MACRO and MENU button  
until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and  
MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.  
1.  
To return the normal mode, press and hold  
down the ENTER button until MACRO is  
disappeared on the LCD.  
Press the “1” button. M1-01 is displayed on the  
LCD.  
2.  
• The remote controller will do nothing if no  
macros are programmed.  
The macro steps are executed in order.  
Also, the step numbers displayed on LCD  
disappear as each step is executed.  
Press the numeric button to be changed.  
2.  
Let’s use the example of programmed MACRO  
1, by pressing “1” button.  
After all macro commands have been  
transmitted, the remote controller returns to  
AMP in normal mode.  
3.  
• LEARN, MACRO indicators and M1-01 is  
displayed blinking.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Press the AMP button and CD button. M1-02 is  
displayed on the LCD.  
Press the MACRO button and “1” button.  
To set the various steps of the macro, press the  
following buttons in order:  
When you are finished programming the  
macro, press the ENTER button until MACRO  
indicator is disappeared on the LCD and  
returns to normal mode.  
3.  
7.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
• The macro commands are transmitted to  
the components in order, and the steps of  
the operations are displayed on the LCD in  
order.  
Press the AMP.  
(1) AMP → POWER ON.  
Now, execute the macro you just  
programmed.  
Note:  
When programing the amplifier's input source in the  
macro program, first press the AMP button, and press  
the source button.  
Press the MACRO button and “2” button.  
↓
↓
• The macro commands are transmitted to  
the components in order, and the steps of  
the operations are displayed on the LCD in  
order.  
(In the case of DVD input: AMP → CD)  
Press the CD.  
Example 2  
Turn this unit’s power on  
↓
Turn the DVD player’s power on  
(2) DVD → POWER ON.  
↓
Change this unit’s input source to DVD  
↓
Press the CD button and “3” button. M1-03 is  
displayed on the LCD.  
4.  
Set the DVD player to play  
Press the CD.  
↓
1.  
3.  
3.  
↓
(3) AMP → DVD.  
Press the “3”.  
3.  
4.  
↓
1.  
5.  
3.  
Press the CD button and 2 button.  
5.  
2.  
5.  
Press and hold the MACRO and SET buttons  
until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and  
MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.  
1.  
2.  
(4) DVD → PLAY.  
↓
↓
When you are finished programming the  
macro, press the ENTER button until the  
MACRO indicator is disappeared and returns  
to normal mode.  
6.  
Press the “2” button. M2-01 is displayed on the  
LCD.  
Now, execute the macro you just  
programmed.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
CLEARING MACRO PROGRAMS  
ADJUSTING THE INTERVAL TIME OF MACRO  
OPERATIONS TRANSMITTING  
The following procedure is used to erase macros  
you have programmed into the remote controller’s  
memory.  
1.  
3.  
1.  
4.  
3.  
1.  
2.  
2.  
Press and hold the MACRO and SETUP button  
until the SETUP is displayed on the LCD.  
1.  
• SETUP is displayed for 3 seconds.  
Press and hold the MACRO and MENU button  
until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and  
MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.  
1.  
Confirm the display changes from SETUP to  
MCRxx. (“xx” means the interval time of macro  
operations transmitting)  
2.  
Press and hold the CL button, then press the  
button for the numeric button to be cleared for  
2.  
3 seconds. (in this case “2”)  
Press the cursor button (1 or 2) to change the  
interval time.  
• M2-CL will be displayed blinking on the  
LCD.  
3.  
• The interval time can be changed from 0.5  
to 5 seconds by 0.5 seconds step.  
Press and hold down the ENTER button until  
MACRO indicator is disappeared on the LCD  
and returns to normal mode.  
4.  
Press the ENTER button to clear and return  
step 1.  
3.  
• To cancel the memory clearing operation,  
do not press ENTER button and simply  
touch any other button.  
To return the normal mode, press and hold  
4.  
down the ENTER button until MACRO indicator  
is disappeared on the LCD and returns to  
normal mode.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
Make the correct setting.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Can not select EX/ES mode.  
Surround center= None has been  
selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP  
In case of trouble, check the following before calling for service:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Are the connections made properly ?  
Are you operating the unit properly following the user’s guide ?  
Are the power amplifiers and speaker working properly ?  
Use 5.1channel source.  
Input signal is incompatible.  
Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input  
signal or analog input signal.  
Can not select Pro Logic IIx Input signal is incompatible.  
mode.  
Use 2 channel DTS input signal, PCM input signal or  
analog input signal.  
Can not select Neo:6 mode.  
Can not select CSII mode.  
No output to Subwoofer Out.  
Input signal is incompatible.  
Input signal is incompatible.  
If the unit does not operate properly, check items shown in the following table.  
If your trouble cannot be recovered with the remedy actions listed in the following table, malfunction of the  
internal circuitry is suspected; immediately unplug the power cable and contact your dealer, nearest Marantz  
authorized dealer or the Marantz Service Center in your country.  
Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input  
signal or analog input signal.  
Select Subwoofer = YES.  
Subwoofer = None has been selected in  
SETUP mode.  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
Be sure to perform digital connection, select digital  
input, then play.  
Noise is produced during Analog has been selected for input.  
DTS-encoded CD or laser  
disc play.  
Connect the power plug to the outlet.  
This unit cannot be turned The power plug is not connected.  
up.  
Cancel mute using the remote controller.  
No sound and picture are Mute is on.  
output even when power is  
Check the encoded channel on the source side.  
A specific channel does not Nothing recorded on source.  
produce output.  
on.  
See the connection diagram and connect the cables  
correctly.  
The input cable is not connected  
correctly.  
Correctly connect the indoor FM and AM antennas  
to FM and AM antenna outlets.  
FM or AM reception fails.  
Antenna connection is incomplete.  
Adjust the master volume.  
Select correct position.  
The master volume control is turned all  
the way down.  
Try changing location where the AM indoor antenna  
is set up.  
Noise is heard during AM Reception is affected by other electrical  
reception. fields.  
The function selector position is wrong.  
Install an FM outdoor antenna.  
Noise is heard during FM The radio waves from the broadcasting  
reception. station are weak.  
Disconnect the headphones. (Speakers will not  
output sound when headphones are connected.)  
No speaker output.  
The headphones are connected to the  
headphone jack.  
Disconnecting power plug for long periods of time  
will erase preset data. If that happens, input the  
preset data again.  
Cannot get programmed Preset data has been erased.  
station when the PRESET  
button is pressed.  
Connect the cable correctly by referring to the  
connection diagram.  
Incorrect Audio or Video for Input cable connected incorrectly.  
selected source.  
Connect the cable correctly by referring to the  
connection diagram.  
Incorrect Audio from  
channel.  
a
Speaker cable connected incorrectly.  
Replace all the batteries with new ones.  
Control with the remote Batteries are consumed.  
controller fails.  
Select different position from which equipment will  
be controlled.  
Remote controller's function-key setting  
is wrong.  
Connect the cable correctly.  
No Audio output from the The center speaker cable connection is  
center channel speaker.  
incomplete.  
Move closer to this unit.  
Remove offending object.  
Disconnect the headphones.  
The distance between this unit and the  
remote commander is too far.  
When STEREO is selected for Surround mode, no  
sound will be output from the center speaker. Set  
another Surround mode.  
STEREO has been selected for Surround  
mode.  
Something is blocking the unit and the  
remote commander.  
Make the correct setting.  
Center = None has been selected in  
SETUP mode.  
Auto Setup (SPEAKER Headphones are connected.  
SETUP) is not working.  
Connect the cable correctly.  
No Audio output from the The surround speaker cable connection  
surround speakers.  
is incomplete.  
When STEREO has been selected for Surround  
mode, no sound will be output from the surround  
speaker. Set another Surround mode.  
STEREO has been selected for Surround  
mode.  
Make the correct setting.  
Surround = None has been selected in  
SETUP mode.  
Connect the cable correctly.  
No Audio output from the The surround back speaker cable  
surround back speakers.  
connection is incomplete.  
Set surround mode EX/ES.  
Make the correct setting.  
Surround mode is not EX/ES mode.  
Surround back = None has been  
selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
HDMI  
USB  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
Even when the USB  
storage device is  
connected, “NO DEVICE”  
remains on the status  
display, and the device is  
not recognized.  
• The unit cannot recognize the • Check whether the USB storage device  
The display does not The connected monitor or projector Be sure to use an HDCP-compatible monitor  
USB storage device because  
of connection trouble or some  
other issue.  
and USB cable are firmly plugged into the  
unit's USB connector.  
appear over an HDMI does not support HDCP.  
connection.  
or projector.  
The HDMI input of on the TV is Set HDMI input so that it turns on, as  
• Try removing the USB storage device  
from the unit, and re-connecting it.  
not on.  
explained in the TV's instruction manual.  
The HDMI output on the source Set HDMI output so that it turns on, as  
component (DVD, Set Top Box, explained in the source component's  
• Try turning the unit’s power off and back  
on, and re-connecting the device.  
etc.) is not on.  
The HDMI mode is not correctly Set HDMI input on the FUNC INPUT  
set on the unit. SETUP menu as explained on page 27.  
instruction manual.  
“UNKNOWN DEVICE” • A device that cannot be • Even when a USB storage device  
recognized by the unit has been  
connected.  
complies with the USB Mass Storage  
Class standard, it may not be possible to  
play its files using the unit. (This does not  
mean that something is wrong with the  
unit itself.)  
appears on the status  
display when the USB  
s t o r a g e d ev i c e i s  
connected.  
The HDMI output video resolution Set the resolution so that it matches, as  
of the source component (DVD, explained in the instruction manuals of both  
Set Top Box, etc.) does not match components.  
the TV specifications.  
• The device has been connected • USBstoragedevicescannotbeconnected  
through a USB hub. through a USB hub.  
The device is connected with a A 5 m or shorter cable is recommended to  
non-standard HDMI cable.  
ensure stable operation and prevent image  
quality deterioration.  
“ U N K N O W N F I L E • A format other than FAT16 • Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32, and  
or FAT32 is used as the USB  
storage device's format.  
record the files.  
SYSTEM” appears on  
the status display when  
a USB storage device is  
connected.  
Power to the unit is off. (When Turn on the power to the unit.  
the unit is on standby, HDMI  
connections cannot be turned  
on.)  
" OV E R C U R R E N T " • The overcurrent protection • No guarantees are made for the operation  
function of the unit’s USB  
connector has been triggered.  
of a hard disk drive that is powered from  
the unit's USB connector.  
appears on the status  
display when a USB  
s t o r a g e d ev i c e i s  
connected.  
The connection between Shut off and then turn the power back on to  
HDMI components was not the unit, TV and source component.  
authenticated.  
Remove the connected USB storage  
device, and turn the unit's power off and  
back on.  
The HDMI OUT RES setting does Set the HDMI OUT RES setting to AUTO.  
not match that of the connected (See page 37)  
TV.  
“NO AUDIO FILE”appears • No playable files have been • Record the supported file on a USB  
recorded on a USB storage  
device.  
storage device.  
on the status display when  
a USB storage device is  
connected.  
Time is needed for the The connection is being There is nothing wrong with the system.  
display of an HDMI authenticated between the HDMI Some HDMI devices require time for  
connection to appear.  
devices.  
authentication.  
“CAN'T PLAY” appears on • An attempt has been made to • The unit cannot play copyright-protected  
play a copyright-protected file.  
files.  
the status display when  
a USB storage device is  
connected.  
Audio is not played The HDMI audio output of the Set the HDMI audio output so that it turns  
back over an HDMI source component (DVD, Set Top on, as explained in the source component's  
• T h e f i l e i s d a m a g e d . • Check the file.  
Alternatively, its extension and  
connection.  
Box, etc.) is not on.  
instruction manual.  
file structure are incompatible.  
The signal format of the source Set the HDMI audio output so that it can  
component (DVD, Set Top Box, connect to the unit, as explained in the  
etc.) is not supported by the unit. source component's instruction manual.  
The files recorded on the • The USB storage device is • If the device is partitioned into a number  
partitioned into a number of  
partitions.  
of partitions, displays only for the first  
partition will appear.  
USB storage device are  
not displayed.  
This unit is set to the HDMI audio In the “THROUGH” mode, sound is not  
• The number of folders exceeds • No displays appear for folders after folder  
“THROUGH” mode.  
produced from the unit. Set it to “ENABLE”.  
(see page 38)  
700 or the number of files  
exceeds 65535.  
no.700 or for files after file no.65535.  
DVD-Audio is not played The DVD player does not support • Use a DVD-Audio player that supports  
back over an HDMI CPPM, therefore it cannot output  
connection. HDMI audio.  
CPPM.  
• Turn on PCM downsampling on the DVD  
player.  
• Use an analog connection.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
SURROUND PURE  
MODE DIRECT  
EXIT  
CLEAR  
XM SATELLITE RADIO  
PROTECTIVE FEATURE  
In some cases, the STANDBY indicator may  
blink slowly, twice per second. In this case, turn  
off the unit, unplug the power cord, and check the  
following points.  
If a problem should arise, first check the following.  
1. Are the connections correct?  
2. Have you operated the receiver according to the operating instructions?  
3. Are the speakers and other components operating properIy?  
• Make sure the speaker cables are not reversed  
and connected to the wrong sides (+ and -) on the  
unit.  
If this unit is not operating properly, Check the items listed in the table beIow. Should the problem persist, there  
may be a malfunction. Disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.  
• Make sure the speaker cables connected to the  
unit are not shorted. (Check both the unit end and  
the speaker end.)  
SYMPTOM  
“TUNER” is displayed.  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
FRONT KEY (BUTTON) LOCK OF THE UNIT  
The XM Mini-Tuner and this unit are not Check that the units are properly  
properly connected. connected.  
• Make sure the volume does not exceed the level  
that the unit is capable of producing.  
To lock all front panel buttons (except the POWER  
ON/OFF button) and the INPUT SELECTER and  
VOLUME knobs, hold the PURE DIRECT and EXIT  
buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least  
3 seconds. At this time, “F-KEY LOCK!” is displayed.  
To unlock the controls, press the same buttons again  
simultaneously for at least 3 seconds. At this time,  
“F-KEY UNLOCK” is displayed, and the buttons are  
released.  
“ANTENNA” is displayed.  
The XM antenna is not properly connected Check that the antenna is properly  
to the Mini-Tuner Dock.  
• When using the unit in a rack or other enclosed  
space, heat may build up inside the unit and  
cause a fire. When installing the unit, be sure  
to leave sufficient space between the top, back  
and both sides of the unit and walls or other AV  
components to prevent the internal temperature  
from rising.  
connected. Also, check the antenna cable  
for damage.  
“NO SIGNAL” is displayed.  
The Signal cannot be received.  
Reposition your XM antenna.  
Receiving only channels 0 and 1.  
The XM Mini-Tuner is not activated.  
Contact XM Satellite Radio.  
(See page 53)  
“UPGRADE TUNER” is displayed.  
The connected XM CNP-1000 is Upgrade the XM CNP-1000 to the XM  
After checking these points, plug in the power cord  
and use the remote controller to turn on the unit.  
Turn down the volume before resuming playback.  
Confirm that there are no problems with the  
speaker connections and playback performance.  
incompatible.  
Mini-Tuner.  
Report the model of the AV receiver and  
the ID number of the CNP-1000 to XM  
Listener Care. (See page 53)  
GENERAL MALFUNCTION  
If the equipment malfunctions, this may be because  
an electrostatic discharge or AC line interference has  
corrupted the information in the equipment memory  
circuits. Therefore:  
If this symptom recurs, request service at your  
nearest service center.  
In rare instances, the unit may enter standby mode  
and the STANDBY indicator may blink rapidly, 8  
times per second. In this case, unplug the power  
cord and request service at your nearest service  
center.  
-
-
disconnect the plug from the AC line supply  
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO  
after waiting at least three minutes, reconnect  
the plug to the AC line supply  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
-
re-attempt to operate the equipment  
“TUNER ERR” is displayed.  
SiriusConnectTM tuner is not properly Check the 8pin mini DIN cable and AC  
connected.  
adapter connection are correct.  
“ANTENNA” is displayed  
“ACQUIRING” is displayed.  
“CALL SIRIUS” is displayed  
“FIRM UPDT” is displayed  
Antenna is not properly connected.  
Check the antenna cable connection is  
correct.  
Memory backup  
• In case a power outage occurs or the power  
cord is accidentally unplugged, this unit is  
equipped with a backup function to prevent  
memory data such as the preset memory  
from being erased.  
The signal cannot be received.  
Reposition your SiriusConnectTM tuner  
and antenna.  
You have not subscribed for the selected Call SIRIUS if you want to subscribe.  
channel.  
(See page 58)  
SiriusConnectTM is updating software.  
Wait until the updating is complete.  
HOW TO RESET THE UNIT  
Should the operation or display seem to be abnormal,  
reset the unit with the following procedure.  
Thisunitisturnedon,pressandholdtheSURROUND  
MODE + CLEAR buttons simultaneously for 3  
seconds or more.  
Remember that the procedure will reset the settings  
of the function selector, Surround mode, delay time,  
TUNER PRESET etc., to their initial settings.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Output Channel  
SL SBL  
SR SBR  
Front information display  
Surround Mode  
EX/ES  
Input Signal  
Decoding  
L/R  
C
SubW Signal format indicators Channel status  
OTHERS  
SURROUND MODE  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) DolbyDigital + +EX  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2 DIGITAL EX  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 TrueHD  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch)  
DTS-ES  
DTS (5.1ch)  
DolbyTrueHD +EX  
DTS-ES  
DTS-ES  
DTS-HD + NEO6  
Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby  
Digital EX  
SA-CD (5.1ch) + Dolby  
Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
dts, ES  
This unit is equipped with many surround modes.These are provided to reproduce a variety of surround sound  
effects, according to the content of the source to be played.  
The available surround modes may be restricted depending on the input signal and speaker setup.  
dts  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
DTS-HD (5.1)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
Multi-PCM  
O
O
O
O
O
PCM  
DSD  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SW  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SW  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
O
O
O
O
O
The relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal  
The surround mode is selected with the surround mode selector on the unit or the remote controller. However,  
the sound you hear is subject to the relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal.That  
relationship is as follows:  
DOLBY  
II  
(PL x movie)  
II  
(PL x music)  
Dolby Surr.EX  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2 DIGITAL EX  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 TrueHD  
2 TrueHD  
2 TrueHD  
2 TrueHD  
PCM  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
Dolby Digital Plus (2ch)  
II  
Dolby Digital 5.1 + PL  
x
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
II  
(PL x game)  
II  
II  
II  
Pro Logic  
Pro Logic  
Pro Logic  
x
x
x
Output Channel  
SL SBL  
SR SBR  
Front information display  
Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) DolbyDigital +  
Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus + PL  
Surround Mode  
AUTO  
Input Signal  
Decoding  
II  
x
L/R  
C
SubW Signal format indicators Channel status  
II  
x
Dolby TrueHD (2ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch)  
DTS-HD (2ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
Analog  
DTS-ES  
DTS 96/24  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Pro Logic  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Dolby Digital 2.0  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
-
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2 DIGITAL EX  
2 DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
II  
DolbyTrueHD + PL  
DolbyTrueHD  
DTS-HD  
Multi Ch-PCM + PL  
SA-CD (5.1ch) + PL  
Pro Logic  
Pro Logic  
Pro Logic  
Pro Logic  
DTS 5.1  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
Neo:6  
x
2 DIGITAL  
II  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
Dolby Digital Plus (2ch)  
Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch)  
Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch)  
Dolby Digital Plus (7.1ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (2ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch)  
Pro Logic x movie  
2 DIGITAL  
II  
II  
x
x
DolbyDigital +  
DolbyDigital +  
DolbyDigital +  
DolbyDigital +  
DolbyTrueHD  
DolbyTrueHD  
DolbyTrueHD  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 TrueHD  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
II  
x
II  
x
II  
x
II  
x
L, R  
L, R  
O
O
-
-
O
L, R  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
2 TrueHD  
2 TrueHD  
DTS  
(Neo:6 Cinema)  
(Neo:6 Music)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
(,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
-
O
-
O
Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch)  
DolbyTrueHD  
O
O
O
O
O
2 TrueHD  
DTS-HD (2ch)  
DTS-HD (5.1ch)  
DTS-HD (6.1ch)  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
(,ex1,ex2)  
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, R  
DTS-ES  
DTS 96/24  
DTS (5.1ch)  
DTS-HD (2ch)  
DTS-HD (5.1ch)  
DTS-HD (6.1ch)  
DTS-ES  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
DTS-HD  
DTS-HD  
DTS-HD  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
DTS-HD  
DTS-HD  
DTS-HD (7.1ch)  
DTS-HD  
O
O
O
O
O
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
(,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
Dolby Digital Plus (2ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (2ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
Neo:6  
CSII  
CSII  
CSII  
CSII  
CSII  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 TrueHD  
DSD  
O
DTS-HD (7.1ch)  
DTS-HD  
O
O
O
O
O
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
L, R  
L, R  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
PCM 96kHz  
HDCD  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (Stereo)  
PCM (Stereo)  
PCM (Stereo 96kHz)  
HDCD  
Stereo  
Multi Ch  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Dolby Digital 2.0  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
O
-
PCM  
PCM  
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
DSD  
L, R  
L, R  
-
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
Analog  
-
-
II  
CS  
(Cinema  
/Music  
/ Mono)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Analog  
7.1ch input  
-
-
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
(,ex1,ex2)  
SOURCE DIRECT Dolby Surr.EX  
PURE DIRECT  
2 DIGITAL EX  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 TrueHD  
2 TrueHD  
2 TrueHD  
Analog  
CSII  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
NEURAL- THX  
STEREO  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
NEURAL_THX  
NEURAL_THX  
NEURAL_THX  
NEURAL_THX  
NEURAL_THX  
NEURAL_THX  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
-
II  
Pro Logic x movie  
DolbyDigital +  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
Dolby Digital Plus (2ch)  
Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) DolbyDigital +  
Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) DolbyDigital +  
Dolby Digital Plus (7.1ch) DolbyDigital +  
Dolby TrueHD (2ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch)  
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
-
-
O
O
-
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
Analog  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
Dolby Digital Plus (2ch)  
Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Stereo  
Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) Stereo  
Dolby Digital Plus (7.1ch) Stereo  
Dolby TrueHD (2ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch)  
DTS-ES  
2 DIGITAL EX  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 TrueHD  
2 TrueHD  
2 TrueHD  
2 TrueHD  
dts, ES  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
DolbyTrueHD  
DolbyTrueHD  
DolbyTrueHD  
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch)  
DolbyTrueHD  
O
O
O
O
O
2 TrueHD  
DTS-ES  
DTS 96/24  
DTS (5.1ch)  
DTS-HD (2ch)  
DTS-HD (5.1ch)  
DTS-HD (6.1ch)  
DTS-ES  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
DTS-HD  
DTS-HD  
DTS-HD  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
-
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
-
-
-
-
-
-
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
(,ex1,ex2)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTS-HD (7.1ch)  
DTS-HD  
O
O
O
O
O
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
DTS 96/24  
DTS (5.1ch)  
DTS-HD (2ch)  
DTS-HD (5.1ch)  
DTS-HD (6.1ch)  
dts 96/24  
dts  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
PCM 96kHz  
HDCD  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (Stereo)  
PCM (Stereo)  
PCM (Stereo 96kHz)  
HDCD  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
-
-
-
PCM  
PCM  
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
-
-
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
(,ex1,ex2)  
-
-
DTS-HD (7.1ch)  
Stereo  
O
-
-
-
O
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Analog  
7.1ch input  
Stereo  
Multi Ch  
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Output Channel  
SL SBL  
SR SBR  
Front information display  
AUTO  
EX/ES  
Surround Mode  
STEREO  
Input Signal  
Decoding  
L/R  
C
SubW Signal format indicators Channel status  
When this mode is selected, the unit determines  
whether the digital input signal is Dolby Digital,  
Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby  
TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24 or PCM  
audio.  
Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel  
sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or  
DTS-ES auto trigger flag in the digital signal.  
When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the  
number of channels for which the corresponding  
signal is encoded will be played.  
Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with  
Dolby surround status automatically subjects that  
signal to Pro Logic IIx movie processing before play.  
PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this  
mode.  
This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for Dolby  
Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source material  
such as DVD.  
This mode cannot be used when an analog input has  
been selected.  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
PCM 96kHz  
HDCD  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
PCM  
PCM  
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
2 DIGITAL EX  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
PCM  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Analog  
-
-
-
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Virtual  
Speaker  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
II  
PL + Dolby Virtual Speaker  
-
-
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been  
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology  
are able to reproduce an extra channel which has  
been added during the mixing of the program.  
This channel, called surround back, places sounds  
behind the listener in addition to the currently  
available front left, front center, front right, surround  
right, surround left and subwoofer channels.  
This additional channel provides the opportunity  
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and  
brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
II  
PL + Dolby Virtual Speaker  
L, R, S  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
II  
PL + Dolby Virtual Speaker  
II  
PL + Dolby Virtual Speaker  
-
-
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
DTS 96/24  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
-
-
-
-
-
-
II  
PL + Dolby Virtual Speaker  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
2 DIGITAL EX  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
PCM  
II  
Analog  
PL + Dolby Virtual Speaker  
-
-
-
Multi Ch.  
Movie  
Music  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Multi Channel  
Multi Channel  
DTS-ES  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
(O)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
Notes:  
L, R, S  
• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD  
players, performing operations such as skip or stop  
may momentarily interrupt the output.  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
DTS 96/24  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do  
not have without surround back speaker(s).  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
Multi Channel  
Multi Channel  
Multi Channel  
PCM  
DSD  
DSD  
PCM  
• When the signal is not decoded, the mode is changed  
to AUTO mode automatically. See page 78 to  
confirm the available decoding modes.  
O
O
O
DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1)  
L, R  
L, R  
DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio to  
the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the acoustic  
positioning, and makes acoustic image movement  
more natural with the 6.1 channel reproduction.  
This unit incorporates a DTS-ES-decoder, which  
can handle DTS-ES Discrete-encoded and DTS-ES  
Matrix-encoded program sources from DVD, etc.  
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete  
recording of all channels, including the surround back  
channel(s), and higher quality audio reproduction.  
DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not have  
surround back speakers.  
PCM, HDCD  
Analog  
Multi Channel  
O
(O)  
O
O
O
ANALOG  
-
(O): Movie mode only.  
Dolby H.P  
SOURCE DIRECT  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2 DIGITAL EX  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
2 DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit  
Acoustic EQ. and bass management configuration  
are bypassed for full-range frequency response and  
the purist audio reproduction.  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Stereo  
Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) Stereo  
Dolby Digital Plus (7.1ch) Stereo  
Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch)  
Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch)  
DTS-ES  
DTS 96/24  
DTS (5.1ch)  
DTS-HD (5.1ch)  
DTS-HD (6.1ch)  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 DIGITAL PLUS  
2 TrueHD  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Stereo  
Notes:  
2 TrueHD  
2 TrueHD  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
• Speaker size is set to Front L/R = LARGE, Center =  
LARGE, Surround L/R = LARGE and Subwoofer  
= YES automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and  
additional processing are deactivated.  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)  
L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE  
(,ex1,ex2)  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
Stereo  
• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD  
players, performing operations such as skip or stop  
may momentarily interrupt the output.  
DTS-HD (7.1ch)  
Stereo  
O
-
-
-
-
dts-HD MSTR/HIRES  
Multi Ch-PCM  
PCM  
HDCD  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
Dolby H.P  
O
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
• In SOURCE DIRECT mode, ACOUSTIC EQ and  
M-DAX are not available.  
ANALOG  
L, R  
Notes:  
Abbreviations  
L/R : Front speakers  
C : Center speaker  
SL/SR : Surround speakers  
SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers  
SubW : Subwoofer  
• Dolby Digital (2 channel L/R): Speakers for signal  
with Dolby Surround are fully equipped.  
PURE DIRECT  
The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of  
noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct mode,  
by blocking output from the video jacks (VIDEO,  
S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and HDMI) and  
turning the FL display off.  
• No sound is outputs from the surround speaker,  
center speaker and subwoofer if the DVD disc has  
no surround data.  
LFE : Low frequency efects  
ex : Extension  
• Surround modes other than Stereo are not available  
during Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-  
HD playback.  
Note:  
If surround modes other than Stereo are selected  
and Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-  
HD content is played, the surround mode setting is  
disabled.  
• In PURE DIRECT mode, ACOUSTIC EQ and M-  
DAX are not available.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
2 MODE  
dts  
STEREO  
CAUTION  
dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music  
This mode bypasses all surround processing.  
In stereo program sources, the left and right channels  
play normally when PCM audio or analog stereo is  
input.  
With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1 channels  
are converted to two channel stereo. 96 kHz PCM  
source material can be played back in stereo mode.  
(Dolby Digital, Pro Logic IIx MOVIE, Pro Logic II  
MUSIC, Pro Logic IIx GAME)  
This mode is used with source materials encoded in  
Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround.  
x
Note for DTS  
This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials  
such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some 2  
channel sources.  
•
To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD  
player needs to support DTS digital output. You  
may not be able to play some DTS source signals  
from certain CD players and LD players even if  
you connect the player to the unit digitally. This is  
because the digital signal has been processed  
(such as the output level, sampling frequency or  
frequency response), and the unit cannot recognize  
the signal as DTS data.  
dts  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
This mode is enabled when playing source materials  
encoded in Dolby Digital.  
Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby  
Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels (left,  
center, right, surround left and surround right) and a  
Low Frequency Effect channel.  
Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this  
mode.  
This mode is enabled when playing source materials  
encoded in dts multichannel.  
Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts  
sources provides five main audio channels (left,  
center, right, surround left and surround right) and a  
Low Frequency Effects channel.  
dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode.  
The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog  
input has been selected.  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses proprietary  
technology of Dolby Laboratories to create a virtual  
surround sound field using only two speakers for the  
front channels, allowing the user to experience sound  
as if surround speakers were actually being used.  
• Depending on the player used, DTS play may  
produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction.  
• While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are  
playing in another surround mode, you cannot  
switch to digital input or from digital input to analog  
input from the INPUT SETUP in the MAIN MENU  
or by pressing the A/D button.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx has 5 modes:  
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music  
MULTI CH. (MOVIE, MUSIC)  
This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6 channel  
signals using high-accuracy digital matrix technology.  
The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete properties  
in the frequency characteristics of the channels as  
well as in channel separation.  
According to the signals to be played back, DTS Neo:6  
uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode optimized for  
movie playback or the Neo:6 Music mode optimized  
for music playback.  
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround  
sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo movie  
soundtracks.  
• You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a  
multiroom.  
This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more  
natural soundstage from two channel source material.  
This is done by feeding the left channel signal to  
both the left front and left surround speakers and the  
right channel signal to both the right front and right  
surround speakers. Additionally, the center channel  
reproduces a mix of the right and left channels.  
•
The outputs forVCR OUT, TAPE OUT and CD/CD-R  
OUT output analog audio signals only. Do not record  
from CDs or LDs that support DTS using these  
outputs. If you do, the DTS-encoded signal will be  
recorded as noise.  
Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround  
sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or  
digital), such as CD, tape, FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc.  
Pro Logic IIx GAME  
This mode restores the impact low-frequency  
surround effects by routing them to the system’s  
subwoofer.  
Note or Dolby Digital Surround EX  
Note:  
•
When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded  
software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the  
EX/ES mode.  
• Audio is not output from the CENTER channel  
when using MULTI CH. MUSIC mode.  
Note:  
•
The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input  
signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD  
or PCM format.  
5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Movie  
This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound from  
• NotethatsomeDolbyDigitalSurroundEX-encoded  
software does not contain the identification signal.  
In this case, set the EX/ES mode manually.  
Neural Surround  
5.1 channel sources movie soundtracks  
.
NeuralSurroundTM representsthelatestadvancement  
in surround technology developed for music.  
Neural SurroundTM employs psychoacoustic  
frequency domain processing which allows delivery  
of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel  
separation and localization of audio elements.  
System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-  
channel surround playback.  
5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Music  
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound  
from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks.  
CIRCLE SURROUND II  
(CSII-CINEMA, CSII-MUSIC, CSII-MONO)  
Note for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio  
•
The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can be  
used when playing PCM signals with a sampling  
frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from DVD-Video/  
Audio discs).  
Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel  
surround sound playback of non-encoded and  
multichannel encoded material.  
Backward compatibility provides listeners with up to  
6.1 channels of surround performance from an entire  
collection of music and film, including broadcast,  
videotape and stereo recorded music.  
Depending on source material, you can select CSII-  
Cinema mode, CSII-Music mode or CSII-Mono  
mode.  
Notes:  
• Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic IImode  
when the SURR. B is set to “None” from SPEAKER  
SETUP menu. (See page 33)  
•
•
Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output. For  
details, refer to the player’s operation manual.  
• Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel input  
signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or  
PCM format.  
Some DVD discs feature copy protection.When using  
such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output from the  
DVD player. For details, refer to the player’s operation  
manual.  
Note for HDCD  
Note:  
•
HDCD is effective only through digital input.  
• The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input  
signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD  
or PCM format.  
•
You may not be able to play some HDCD source  
signals from certain CD players if you connect the  
player to the unit digitally.This is because the digital  
signal has been processed (such as the output level,  
sampling frequency or frequency response) and the  
unit cannot recognize the signal as HDCD data.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
• dts Digital Surround ES®  
• dts Digital Surround  
DESCRIPTION  
DTS was introduced in 1994 to provide 5.1 channels  
of discrete digital audio into home theater systems.  
DTSbringsyoupremiumqualitydiscretemultichannel  
digital sound to both movies and music.  
DTS is a multichannel sound system designed to  
create full range digital sound reproduction.  
The no compromise DTS digital process sets the  
standard of quality for cinema sound by delivering  
an exact copy of the studio master recordings to  
neighborhood and home theaters.  
DTS-ES Extended Surround is a new multichannel  
digital signal format developed by Digital Theater  
Systems Inc.While offering high compatibility with the  
conventional DTS Digital Surround format, DTS-ES  
Extended Surround greatly improves the 360-degree  
surround impression and space expression thanks  
to further expanded surround signals. This format  
has been used professionally in movie theaters since  
1999.  
In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C,  
SL, SR and LFE), DTS-ES Extended Surround also  
offers the SB (Surround Back) channel for surround  
playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES  
Extended Surround includes two signal formats with  
different surround signal recording methods, as DTS-  
ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1.  
DTS-HD Master Audio is capable of delivering audio  
that is a bit-for-bit identical to the studio master.  
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio at super high  
variable bit rates -24.5 mega-bits per second (Mbps)  
on Blu-ray discs and 18.0 Mbps on HD-DVD - that  
are significantly higher than standard DVDs . This bit  
stream is so “fast” and the transfer rate is so “high”  
that it can deliver the Holy Grail of audio: 7.1 audio  
channels at 96k sampling frequency/24 bit depths  
that are identical to the original.With DTS-HD Master  
Audio, you will be able to experience movies and  
music, exactly as the artist intended: clear, pure, and  
uncompromised.  
Neural-THX® Surround has been chosen as the  
official surround sound broadcast format for leading  
FM/HD and satellite radio and television stations  
worldwide. Neural-THX Surround delivers the rich  
envelopment and discrete image detail of surround  
sound in a format 100% compatible with stereo.  
Now, every moviegoer can hear the sound exactly as  
the moviemaker intended.  
DTS can be enjoyed in the home for either movies or  
music on of DVD’s, LD’s, and CD’s.  
Neural-THX Surround draws the brain’s attention  
to sonic details in musical instruments, vocals and  
ambience that are typically masked by other playback  
systems. This allows the listener to fully experience  
the richness and subtleties in recorded performance  
as never before for both surround encoded material  
and regular stereo material such as CDs or digital  
media players.  
• dts Neo:6®  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent  
#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;5,978,762;  
6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide  
patents issued & pending.  
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos,  
Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are  
trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All  
Rights Reserved.  
The advantages of discrete multichannel systems  
over matrix are well known.  
• dts Digital Surround 96/24  
Buteveninhomesequippedfordiscretemultichannel,  
there remains a need for high-quality matrix decoding.  
This is because of the large library of matrix surround  
motion pictures available on disc and on VHS tape;  
and analog television broadcasts.  
The typical matrix decoder of today derives a center  
channel and a mono surround channel from two-  
channel matrix stereo material. It is better than a  
simple matrix in that it includes steering logic to  
improve separation, but because of its mono, band-  
limited surround it can be disappointing to users  
accustomed to discrete multichannel.  
The stereo CD is a 16-bit medium with sampling at  
44.1 kHz. Professional audio has been 20- or 24-  
bit for some time, and there is increasing interest  
in higher sampling rates both for recording and for  
delivery into the home. Greater bit depths provide  
extended dynamic range. Higher sampling rates  
allow wider frequency response and the use of anti-  
alias and reconstruction filters with more favorable  
aural characteristics.  
Neural-THX Surround: Taking Surround to the Next  
Level.  
This product is manufactured under license from  
Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. Marantz  
hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, non-  
transferable, limited right of use to this product under  
USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other  
technology or trademarks owned by Neural Audio  
Corporation and THX Ltd.“Neural Surround”, “Neural  
Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and  
logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a  
trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in  
some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
DTS 96/24 allows for 5.1channel sound tracks to be  
encoded at a rate of 96kHz/24bits on DVD-Video  
titles.  
When DVD-video appeared, it became possible to  
deliver 24-bit, 96 kHz audio into the home, but only in  
two channels, and with serious limitations on picture.  
This capability has had little use.  
DVD-audio allows 96/24 in six channels, but a  
new player is needed, and only analog outputs are  
provided, necessitating the use of the D/A converters  
and analog electronics provided in the player.  
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can deliver up to 7.1  
channels of sound that is virtually indistinguishable  
from the original. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio  
delivers audio at high constant bit rates superior to  
standard DVDs---6.0 Mbps on Blu-ray discs and 3.0  
Mbps on HD-DVD to produce outstanding sound  
quality. It is capable of delivering up to 7.1 channels  
at 96k sampling frequency/24 bit depth resolution. It  
allows content creators to deliver rich, high definition  
audio on movies where disc space may not allow for  
DTS-HD Master Audio.  
Neo:6 offers several important improvements as  
follow,  
• Neo:6 provides up to six full-band channels of  
matrix decoding from stereo matrix material. Users  
with 6.1 and 5.1 systems will derive six and five  
separate channels, respectively, corresponding to  
the standard home-theater speaker layouts.  
• Neo:6 technology allows various sound elements  
within a channel or channels to be steered  
separately, and in a way which follows naturally  
from the original presentation.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent  
#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;  
6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,003,467 & other U.S. and  
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, DTS  
Digital Surround, ES, and Neo:6 are registered  
trademarks and the DTS logos, Symbol and DTS  
96/24 are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS,  
Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
DTS 96/24 offers the following:  
1. Sound quality transparent to the original 96/24  
master.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent  
#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;  
6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide  
patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered  
trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD,  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
• Neo:6 offers a music mode to expand stereo  
nonmatrix recordings into the five- or six-channel  
layout, inawaywhichdoesnotdiminishthesubtlety  
and integrity of the original stereo recording.  
2. Full backward compatibility with all existing  
decoders. (Existing decoders will output a 48 kHz  
signal)  
3. No new player required: DTS 96/24 can be carried  
on DVD-video, or in the video zone of DVD-audio,  
accessible to all DVD players.  
Audio and DTS-HD High Res Audio are trademarks  
of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights  
Reserved.  
4. 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-  
motion video, for music programs and motion  
picture soundtracks on DVD-video.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
Dolby Digital Plus is a highly sophisticated and  
versatile audio codec based on Dolby Digital and  
designed specifically to adapt to the changing  
demands of future audio, video delivery, and audio  
storage systems while simultaneously retaining  
backwards compatibility with the existing Dolby  
Digital 5.1-channel home theater systems in use  
today.  
TheDolbyHeadphonetechnologyprovidesasurround  
sound listening experience over headphones.  
HDCD® (High Definition Compatible Digital ®) is a  
patented process for delivering on Compact Disc the  
full richness and details of the original microphone  
feed.  
HDCD encoded CDs sound better because they are  
encoded with 20-bits of real musical information as  
compared to 16-bits for all other CDs.  
HDCD overcomes the limitation of the 16-bit CD  
format by using a sophisticated system to encode  
the additional four bits onto the CD while remaining  
completely compatible with the CD format.  
When listening to HDCD recordings, you hear more  
dynamic range, a focused 3-D sound stage, and  
extremely natural vocal and musical timbre. With  
HDCD, you get the body, depth and emotion of the  
original performance not a flat, digital imitation.  
HDCD system manufactured under license from  
Microsoft. This product is covered by one or more  
of the following: In the United States 5,479,168  
5,638,074 5,640,161 5,808,574 5,838,274 5,854,600  
5,864,311 5,872,531 and in Australia 669,114 with  
other patents pending.  
Dolby Digital identifies the use of Dolby Digital audio  
coding for such consumer formats as DVD and DTV.  
As with film sound, Dolby Digital can provide up  
to five full-range channels for left, center, and right  
screen channels, independent left and right surround  
channels, and a sixth (“.1”) channel for low-frequency  
effects.  
When listening to multichannel content such as DVD  
movies over headphones, the listening experience  
is fundamentally different than listening to speakers.  
Since the headphone speaker drivers are covering  
the pinna of the ear, the listening experience differs  
greatly from traditional speaker playback. Dolby  
utilizes patented headphone perspective curves to  
solve this problem and provides a non-fatiguing,  
immersive, home theater listening experience. Dolby  
Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D audio from  
stereo material.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is an improved matrix  
decoding technology that provides better spatiality  
and directionality on Dolby Surround program  
material; provides a convincing three-dimensional  
soundfield on conventional stereo music recordings;  
and is ideally suited to bring the surround experience  
to automotive sound. While conventional surround  
programming is fully compatible with Dolby Surround  
Pro Logic II decoders, soundtracks will be able to be  
encoded specifically to take full advantage of Pro  
Logic II playback, including separate left and right  
surround channels. (Such material is also compatible  
with conventional Pro Logic decoders.)  
Circle Surround II (CS-II) is a powerful and versatile  
multichannel technology. CS-II is designed to enable  
up to 6.1 multichannel surround sound playback  
from mono, stereo, CS encoded sources and other  
matrix encoded sources. In all cases the decoder  
extends it into 6 channels of surround audio and a  
LFE/subwoofer signal. The CS-II decoder creates a  
listening environment that places the listener “inside”  
music performances and dramatically improves  
both hi-fi audio conventional surround-encoded  
video material. CS-II provides composite stereo rear  
channels to greatly improve separation and image  
positioning– adding a heightened sense of realism to  
both audio and A/V productions.  
Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technologycertified  
by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized  
surround sound experience from two speakers using  
a multichannel Dolby Digital source. Additionally,  
Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the surround  
sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby  
Pro Logic II.  
Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original  
Multichannel audio information and provides the  
listener with the sensation of being surrounded by  
additional speakers.  
Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth output  
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done  
using a matrix decoder that derives three surround  
channels from the two in the original recording. For  
best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with  
movies soundtracks recorded with Dolby Digital  
Surround EX.  
HDMI, the  
and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
HDMI Licensing LLC.  
About Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
CS-II is packed with other useful feature like dialog  
clarity (SRS Dialog) for movies and cinema-like bass  
enrichment (TruBass). CS-II can enable the dialog  
to become clearer and more discernable in movies  
and it enables the bass frequencies contained in the  
original programming to more closely achieve low  
frequencies–overcoming the low frequency limitations  
of the speakers by full octave.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology delivers a natural  
and immersing 7.1-channel listening experience  
to the home theater environment. A product of  
Dolby's expertise in surround sound and matrix  
decoding technologies, Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a  
complete surround sound solution that maximizes  
the entertainment experience from stereo as well as  
5.1-channel encoded sources.  
Dolby® TrueHD is Dolby’s next-generation lossless  
technology developed for high-definition disc-based  
media. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound  
that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,  
unlocking the true high-definition entertainment  
experience on next-generation discs. When coupled  
with high-definition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an  
unprecedented home theater experience that lets  
you enjoy sound as stunning as the high-definition  
picture.  
Circle Surround II, SRS and  
symbol are  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is fully compatible with Dolby  
Surround Pro Logic technology and can optimally  
decode the thousands of commercially available  
Dolby Surround encoded video cassettes and  
television programs with enhanced depth and  
spatiality. It can also process any high-quality  
stereo or Advanced Resolution 5.1-channel music  
content into a seamless 6.1- or 7.1-channel listening  
experience.  
trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.  
Circle Surround II technology is incorporated under  
license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
It measures the distance to each loudspeaker from  
the main listening position and adjusts the delays  
so the sound from each loudspeaker arrives at the  
same time. Finally, Audyssey MultEQ determines the  
playback level of each loudspeaker and adjusts the  
volume trims so all levels are equal.  
Several factors can degrade the sound from even  
the best loudspeakers in a listening room. One  
of the most important is the interaction of sound  
from the loudspeakers with large surfaces such as  
walls, the floor and the ceiling in the room. Even  
with careful loudspeaker placement and acoustical  
treatments, there are significant problems that are  
caused by room acoustics. These include reflections  
from nearby surfaces and standing waves created  
between large parallel surfaces in the room. In a  
home theater, the situation is further complicated  
because there are several listening locations. The  
effects of room acoustics on the sound arriving at  
each person’s ears are very different and the result is  
a listening experience that is degraded in a different  
way for each person in the room.  
Manufactured under license from Audyssey  
Laboratories. U.S. and foreign patents pending.  
MultEQ is a registered trademark of Audyssey  
Laboratories.  
x.v.Color  
It is not uncommon to have variations in two adjacent  
seats as large as 10 dB, particularly in the frequency  
range below 250 Hz.The solution to this problem is to  
apply room correction after measuring precisely how  
each loudspeaker interacts with the room. Because  
the room causes variations in the frequency response  
of the loudspeakers that are so large from seat to  
seat, it is important to sample the sound from several  
locations in the listening room. This should be done  
even if there is only one listener. Measurement at a  
single location is not representative of the acoustical  
problems in the room and will, in most cases,  
degrade overall performance. Audyssey MultEQ is  
the only technology able to achieve room correction  
for multiple listeners in a large listening area. It does  
so by combining the data collected at several points  
in the room from each loudspeaker and then applying  
correction to minimize the acoustical effects of the  
room and match the frequency resolution of human  
perception (known as psychoacoustics).  
“x.v.Color” and “x.v.Color” logo are trademarks of  
Sony Corporation.  
Windows and Windows Media Audio are registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation  
of the United States in the United States and other  
countries.  
iTunes is a registered trademark or trademark of  
Apple Inc. of the United States in the United States  
and other countries.  
XM Satellite Radio Ready  
Further, MultEQ correction is applied in frequency  
and time domains and removes artifacts, such as  
smearing or modal ringing, sometimes associated  
with traditional methods of room equalization.  
The XM name and related logos are registered  
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
XM HD Surround uses Neural SurroundTM technology  
to achieve optimal surround sound from XM radio.  
Inadditiontocorrectingfrequencyresponseproblems  
over a wide listening area, Audyssey MultEQ provides  
a completely automated sound system set-up  
process. It identifies the number of loudspeakers  
connected to the amplifiers and whether they are  
satellites or subwoofers. If there is a least one  
subwoofer connected, Audyssey MultEQ determines  
the optimum crossover frequency between each  
satellite and the subwoofer(s). It automatically  
checks the polarity of each loudspeaker and alerts  
the user to the ones wired out-of- phase relative to  
the others.  
© 2008 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS” and  
the SIRIUS dog logo are registered trademarks of  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT EXTERNAL  
SURFACES  
FM TUNER SECTION  
ACCESSORIES  
The exterior finish of your unit will last indefinitely with  
proper care and cleaning, Never use scouring pads,  
steel wool, scourging powders or harsh chemical  
agents (e.g., lye solution), alcohol, thinner, benzine,  
insecticide or other volatile substances as these wil  
mar the finish of the equipment. Likewise, never  
use cloths containing chemical substances. If the  
equipment get dirty, wipe the external surfaces with  
a soft, lint-free cloth.  
Frequency Range ................................87.5 – 108.0 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity ............................IHF 1.8 µV/16.4 dBf  
Signal to Noise Ratio ................... Mono/Stereo 75/70 dB  
Distortion......................................Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3 %  
Stereo Separation.........................................1 kHz 45 dB  
Alternate Channel Selectivity................. 400 kHz 60 dB  
Image Rejection......................................98.1 MHz 70 dB  
Tuner Output Level ........... 1 kHz, 75 kHz Dev 800 mV  
Remote Controller RC003SR ........................................ 1  
Microphone................................................................... 1  
AAA-size batteries ........................................................ 2  
FM Antenna ................................................................... 1  
AM Loop Antenna .......................................................... 1  
AC cable ....................................................................... 1  
User Guide..................................................................... 1  
Warranty Card (USA x 1, Canada x 1)  
AM TUNER SECTION  
If the equipment becomes heavily soiled:  
DIMENSIONS  
Frequency Range ................................... 520 – 1710 kHz  
Signal to Noise Ratio ..............................................50 dB  
Usable Sensitivity .....................................Loop 400µV/m  
Distortion...................................400Hz, 30 % Mod. 0.5 %  
Selectivity................................................. 20 kHz 70 dB  
• dilute some washing up liquid in water, in a ratio of  
one part detergent to six parts water.  
• dip a soft, lint free in the solution and wring the it is  
damp.  
• wipe the equipment with the damp cloth.  
AUDIO SECTION  
• dry the equipment by wiping it with a dry cloth.  
Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)  
Front L&R ..........................................8 ohms 100 W / Ch  
Center................................................8 ohms 100 W / Ch  
Surround L&R....................................8 ohms 100 W / Ch  
Surround Back L&R...........................8 ohms 100 W / Ch  
Front L&R ..........................................6 ohms 125 W / Ch  
Center................................................6 ohms 125 W / Ch  
Surround L&R....................................6 ohms 125 W / Ch  
Surround Back L&R...........................6 ohms 125 W / Ch  
Input Sensitivity/Impedance...............180 mV/ 47 Kohms  
Signal to Noise Ratio(Analog Input / Pure Direct) ....105 dB  
Frequency Response  
(Analog Input / Pure Direct) .......8 Hz – 100 kHz ( 3 dB)  
(Digital Input / 96 kHz PCM) ........8 Hz – 45 kHz ( 3 dB)  
REPAIRS  
VIDEO  
Only the most competent and qualified service  
technicians should be allowed to service the  
factory-trained warranty station personnel have  
the knowledge and special facilities needed for  
repair and calibration of this precision equipment.  
After the warranty period has expired, repairs will  
be performed for a charge if the equipment can be  
returned to normal operation.  
In the event of difficulty, refer to your dealer or write  
directly to the nearest location to you that is listed on  
the Marantz Authorized Service Station list. If writing,  
please include the model and serial number of the  
equipment together with a full description of what you  
think is abnormal about the equipment’s behaviour.  
Television Format....................................................NTSC  
Input Level/Impedance ...........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms  
Output Level/Impedance.........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms  
Video Frequency Response .......5 Hz to 8 MHz (– 1 dB)  
Video Frequency (Component) ....5 Hz to 80 MHz (– 1 dB)  
S/N..........................................................................60 dB  
HDMI  
17-3/8 ins. (440.0 mm)  
Version.........................................................1.3a [INPUT]  
.........................................................1.3a [OUTPUT]  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement................................AC 120 V 60 Hz  
Power Consumption ..............................................600 W  
Standby Power Consumption .................. (Normal) 0.7 W  
......................................................(Economy) 0.4 W  
Weight...................................................................13.2 kg  
Specifications subject to change without prior notice.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RCA.............................................................. 1003, 1004, 1005  
1006, 1007, 1008  
Hitachi................................................. 1003, 1012, 1031, 1032  
1037, 1041, 1045, 1047  
Yamaha .................................................................. 1003, 1024  
Zenith............................................................ 1003, 1009, 1010  
1132, 1144, 1153  
SETUP CODES  
1014, 1024, 1049, 1069  
1065, 1068, 1082, 1088  
TV  
1075, 1079, 1085, 1087  
1094, 1139, 1140, 1145, 1159  
CD  
Acer ...................................................................................1141  
Admiral ......................................................... 1002, 1009, 1089  
Aiko................................................................................... 1059  
Aiwa......................................................................... 1117, 1118  
Akai................................................................................... 1001  
Amtron.............................................................................. 1023  
Anam .................................................................................1113  
Anam National.............................................. 1023, 1069, 1092  
AOC.....................................................1003, 1024, 1049, 1127  
Audiovox........................................................................... 1023  
Bell & Howell .......................................................... 1009, 1025  
Benq ........................................................................1104, 1142  
Broksonic.............................................1003, 1097, 1098, 1113  
Celebrity ........................................................................... 1001  
Citizen........................................................... 1003, 1013, 1023  
1026, 1059, 1063  
1088, 1093, 1094, 1101  
Infinity ............................................................................... 1067  
Janeil .................................................................................1134  
JBL ................................................................................... 1067  
JC Penney.................................................... 1003, 1013, 1018  
1019, 1024, 1026  
AIWA............................................................. 3001, 3002, 3003  
AKAI ............................................................. 3004, 3005, 3006  
AUDIO ............................................................................. 3007  
AUDIO LABS.................................................................... 3008  
CALIFORNIA.................................................................... 3008  
CARVER........................................................3010, 3011, 3009  
CASIO .................................................................... 3012, 3020  
CURTIS .................................................................. 3020, 3012  
DENON............................................................................. 3013  
EMERSON ....................................................................... 3014  
FISHER .....................................3011, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3018  
GE .................................................................................... 3019  
GENEXXA .................................................... 3014, 3021, 3020  
HARMON...................................................... 3022, 3023, 3051  
HITACHI ........................................................................... 3020  
INKEL ............................................................................... 3024  
JC PENNEY ................................................. 3012, 3020, 3025  
JVC......................................................................... 3026, 3027  
KARDON ...................................................... 3022, 3051, 3023  
KENWOOD......................................... 3028, 3029, 3030, 3031  
3032, 3033  
1103, 1110, 1113, 1153  
Realistic.............................................. 1013, 1015, 1023, 1025  
1045, 1100, 1103, 1110  
Runco ......................................................................1010, 1153  
Sampo ...............................................................................1150  
Samsung ............................................ 1003, 1013, 1024, 1026  
1040, 1045, 1062, 1078  
1046, 1047, 1054  
1063, 1083, 1085  
1100, 1103, 1110  
1083, 1090, 1100, 11051114  
1112, 1133, 1154  
1120, 1121, 1146, 1148, 1157  
Jensen.............................................................................. 1003  
JVC............................................................... 1028, 1029, 1045  
1047, 1050, 1060, 1065  
Sansui................................................................................1119  
Sanyo ................................................. 1003, 1025, 1051, 1072  
1077, 1091, 1156, 1157, 1158  
Kawasho................................................................. 1001, 1003  
Kenwood........................................................................... 1003  
Kloss Novabeam .................................1023, 1056, 1057, 1134  
KTV............................................................... 1013, 1023, 1033  
1034, 1073, 1099, 1113  
Sharp............................................................ 1003, 1013, 1014  
1015, 1045, 1055, 1064  
1066, 1076, 1089, 1123  
Colortyme ............................................................... 1003, 1043  
Contec ...............................................................................1113  
Contec/Cony................................................. 1023, 1045, 1047  
Craig....................................................1020, 1022, 1023, 1113  
Crown ..................................................................... 1023, 1067  
Curtis Mathes ............................................... 1003, 1013, 1025  
1026, 1062, 1103, 1110  
Signature .......................................................................... 1009  
Sony ..............................................................1001, 1102, 1108  
Soundesign................................1003, 1023, 1038, 1063, 1113  
Starlite .............................................................................. 1023  
Supre-Macy .......................................................................1134  
Sylvania........................................................ 1003, 1039, 1042  
1052, 1053, 1056, 1057  
LG........................................................................... 1024, 1030  
M.Wards ....................................................... 1002, 1009, 1038  
Magnavox..................................................... 1003, 1052, 1053  
1056, 1057, 1063  
1067, 1081, 1106  
KRELL .............................................................................. 3010  
LUXMAN............................................. 3035, 3036, 3037, 3038  
LX I ............................................................... 3012, 3020, 3014  
MAGNAVOX................................................. 3010, 3039, 3040  
MARANTZ .......................................... 3010, 3041, 3042, 3043  
MATHES................................................................. 3012, 3020  
MCS........................................................................ 3012, 3020  
MGA.................................................................................. 3023  
MISSION .......................................................................... 3010  
MITSUBISHI........................................................... 3023, 3044  
NAD........................................................................ 3034, 3045  
NAKAMICHI.................................................. 3046, 3047, 3048  
NEC MCS......................................................................... 3025  
NIKKO .................................................................... 3007, 3016  
ONKYO............................................... 3049, 3050, 3051, 3052  
3055, 3102, 3103  
Marantz................................................1003, 1031, 1067, 1122  
Mitsubishi...................................................... 1003, 1024, 1051  
1115, 1122, 1133  
Daewoo .............................................. 1003, 1013, 1024, 1035  
1036, 1059, 1084, 1101  
1063, 1067, 1089, 1151  
Symphonic.................................................... 1023, 1039, 1044  
Tandy................................................................................ 1014  
Tatung............................................................................... 1069  
Technics............................................................................ 1018  
Techwood ............................................................... 1003, 1018  
Teknika ............................................... 1003, 1009, 1013, 1023  
1024, 1026, 1038, 1045  
Daytron......................................................... 1003, 1013, 1016  
Dimensia..................................................................1103, 1110  
Dumont..........................................................1003, 1010, 1153  
Electroband ...................................................................... 1001  
Electrohome ........................................1001, 1003, 1069, 1133  
Emerson ....................................................... 1003, 1013, 1015  
1020, 1021, 1022, 1023  
Motorola.................................................................. 1014, 1069  
NEC.......................................... 1003, 1012, 1024, 1043, 1069  
NET-TV....................................................................1137, 1150  
Orion....................................................................... 1020, 1096  
Panasonic..................................1017, 1067, 1069, 1095, 1111  
Philips..................................................1003, 1011, 1045, 1052  
1054, 1056, 1057, 1058  
1047, 1059, 1063, 1111, 1113  
1025, 1038, 1044, 1045  
Telecaption ....................................................................... 1074  
Toshiba ......................................................... 1003, 1019, 1025  
1026, 1042, 1074, 1098  
1063, 1067, 1069, 1106  
1048, 1055, 1061, 1094  
Pioneer ......................................................... 1003, 1018, 1037  
1070, 1071, 1094  
1096, 1099, 1101, 1113  
Envision............................................................................ 1003  
Fisher...................................................1025, 1051, 1091, 1160  
Fujitsu..................................................1038, 1124, 1125, 1155  
Funai..............................................................1023, 1038, 1113  
Gateway ............................................................................1150  
GE ..................................................... 1003, 1018, 1022, 1046  
1054, 1069, 1085, 1103  
1107, 1111, 1135, 1136  
1145, 1147, 1149  
Totevision.......................................................................... 1013  
Universal................................................................. 1046, 1054  
Video Concepts .................................................................1113  
Viewsonic ......................................................1006, 1022, 1109  
1128, 1129, 1130, 1131  
Plasmsync .........................................................................1135  
Portland .............................................. 1003, 1013, 1024, 1059  
Price Club......................................................................... 1026  
Prism ................................................................................ 1018  
Proscan .............................................. 1004, 1005, 1006, 1007  
1008, 1085, 1103, 1110  
OPTIMUS ..................................3011, 3014, 3020, 3028, 3053  
3054, 3056, 3057, 3058, 3059  
PANASONIC................................................. 3008, 3060, 3061  
PHILIPS.............................................. 3009, 3010, 3010, 3040  
PIONEER ................................. 3020, 3021, 3062, 3063, 3064  
QUASAR .......................................................................... 3008  
RCA...........................................3011, 3014, 3065, 3066, 3067  
3068, 3069  
1138, 1143, 1145, 1150  
1110, 1113, 1133, 1136, 1153  
Wards ........................................................... 1003, 1009, 1015  
1024, 1038, 1044, 1046  
Proton..................................................................... 1003, 1045  
Quasar....................................... 1010, 1069, 1073, 1111, 1153  
Radio Shack ................................................. 1003, 1013, 1015  
1023, 1024, 1025, 1045  
Goldstar........................................................ 1003, 1013, 1024  
1030, 1045, 1080  
1052, 1054, 1056, 1057  
1100, 1112, 1154  
1067, 1086, 1103, 1110  
Hallmark ........................................................................... 1003  
Hisense..............................................................................1116  
White Westinghouse................................................1001, 1101  
1100, 1103, 1110, 1113  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REALISTIC..........................................3011, 3014, 3020, 3042  
3054, 3057  
DVD  
DSS  
Aiwa........................................................................ 2036, 2037  
Apex ............................... 2012, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2021, 2034  
BOSE............................................................ 2038, 2039, 2063  
Denon..................................................................... 2047, 2048  
Funai................................................................................. 2049  
GE ...................................................... 2009, 2020, 2029, 2033  
Harman Kardon ................................................................ 2061  
Hitachi........................................................... 2008, 2012, 2031  
JVC............................................................... 2006, 2010, 2040  
2041, 2042, 2043  
Alphastar .......................................................................... 4027  
Amstrad ........................................................ 4046, 4047, 4050  
Atsky................................................................................. 4048  
B Sky B......................................................... 4021, 4045, 4046  
Chaparral.......................................................................... 4039  
DIRECTV...................................................... 4001, 4016, 4044  
DISH Network................................................................... 4030  
Drake................................................................................ 4026  
Echostar ................................... 4007, 4017, 4018, 4019, 4020  
4062, 4063, 4064  
ROTEL.............................................................................. 3010  
RS ORIGINAL .................................................................. 3070  
SAE ........................................................................ 3010, 3083  
SAMSUNG ....................................................................... 3071  
SANSUI .............................................. 3014, 3068, 3072, 3073  
SANYO......................................3011, 3018, 3074, 3075, 3076  
SCOTT ............................................................................. 3014  
SEARS ..................................... 3012, 3014, 3020, 3028, 3042  
SHARP ......................................................... 3028, 3042, 3077  
SHERWOOD............................ 3042, 3056, 3070, 3078, 3024  
SHURE............................................................................. 3025  
SONY ............................. 3039, 3079, 3080, 3081, 3082, 3097  
3098, 3099, 3100, 3101  
Eurosky................................................................... 4047, 4056  
Express Vu ....................................................................... 4017  
Foxtel................................................................................ 4051  
Freesat ............................................................................. 4056  
Fujitsu............................................................................... 4025  
GE ................................................................ 4002, 4008, 4009  
General Instruments............................................... 4036, 4037  
Gradiente................................................................ 4044, 4057  
Hitachi..................................................................... 4001, 4015  
Hughes ................................................................... 4001, 4016  
Humax ...................................... 4049, 4050, 4051, 4052, 4053  
Janeil ................................................................................ 4025  
JVC................................................................................... 4017  
Mitsubishi.......................................................................... 4001  
Nokia .................................................. 4058, 4059, 4060, 4061  
Optima.............................................................................. 4048  
Panasonic............................................................... 4004, 4010  
Philips................................................. 4031, 4035, 4044, 4057  
Proscan ...............................................4002, 4008, 4009, 4011  
Radio Shack ........................................................... 4036, 4037  
RCA.................................................... 4002, 4008, 4009, 4029  
Realistic............................................................................ 4040  
Rural Cable....................................................................... 4036  
Samsung .............. 4022, 4027, 4042, 4043, 4050, 4054, 4055  
Schneider ............................................................... 4041, 4043  
SKY .............................................................. 4044, 4045, 4057  
Skyplus............................................................................. 4048  
Skysat........................................................... 4041, 4047, 4056  
Sony ............................... 4003, 4012, 4014, 4065, 4066, 4067  
Star Choice....................................................................... 4032  
Star Trak........................................................................... 4024  
STS................................................................................... 4038  
SuperDish......................................................................... 4028  
Teac.................................................................................. 4049  
Thomson................................................................. 4046, 4056  
Toshiba ................................................................... 4001, 4034  
Uniden .......................................................... 4005, 4006, 4013  
Universum ........................................................................ 4056  
Video Pall ......................................................................... 4025  
Zenith............................................................ 4023, 4025, 4033  
Kenwood................................................................. 2053, 2054  
Koss.................................................................................. 2058  
Magnavox............................................2007, 2011, 2023, 2025  
Marantz............................................................................. 2025  
Marantz (Blu-ray).............................................................. 2064  
Mitsubishi.................................................................2011, 2015  
Onkyo ............................................................................... 2062  
Oritron..................................................................... 2009, 2030  
Panasonic........................................... 2003, 2015, 2016, 2055  
Philips............................................................2007, 2011, 2058  
Pioneer ......................................................... 2002, 2014, 2056  
Proscan ........................................................ 2009, 2020, 2032  
RCA.......................................... 2005, 2009, 2020, 2035, 2057  
Sampo .............................................................................. 2041  
Samsung .................................. 2008, 2012, 2022, 2024, 2027  
Sanyo ..................................................................... 2050, 2052  
Sharp...................................................................... 2044, 2045  
Sherwood ......................................................................... 2051  
Sony ............................................................. 2001, 2013, 2059  
Toshiba ............................................... 2004, 2008, 2026, 2028  
Yamaha .................................................................. 2046, 2060  
Zenith................................................................................ 2010  
SYLVANIA......................................................................... 3010  
SYMPHONIC.................................................................... 3083  
TEAC........................................ 3016, 3042, 3057, 3083, 3084  
3085, 3086  
TECHNICA ............................... 3007, 3008, 3061, 3087, 3088  
THETA DIGITAL................................................................ 3040  
TOSHIBA.......................................................................... 3045  
VICTOR............................................................................ 3026  
YAMAHA................................... 3007, 3089, 3090, 3091, 3092  
ZENITH..................................... 3016, 3093, 3094, 3095, 3096  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
www.marantz.com  
You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.  
is a registered trademark.  
Printed in China  
08/2008  
541110127020M mzh-d  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

KWC Indoor Furnishings S10R401 User Manual
LeapFrog Baby Toy 605 10217 B User Manual
LevelOne Network Card FCS 1060 User Manual
LG Electronics Air Conditioner LCN240CP User Manual
LG Electronics Car Satellite TV System 42LY970H User Manual
Linksys Network Card WPC4400N User Manual
Makita Power Hammer Rotary Hammer User Manual
Manitowoc Ice Ice Maker Q210 User Manual
Martin Audio Stereo Amplifier MA1400 User Manual
Maxxsonics Speaker AT12D2 User Manual